HACH BioTector B3500c/B3500s Online TOC Analyzer USER MANUAL
Industry Manual Repository
Join the AnalyzeDetectNetwork and Read This Manual and Hundreds of Others Like It! It's Free!
Catalog Number: 10-MAT-452
BioTector B3500c/B3500s Online TOC Analyzer
USER MANUAL
September 2017, Edition 1
BS5AX 2.11a
Original Instructions in English
© Copyright BioTector 2017. All rights reserved. Printed by BioTector. Printed in the Republic of Ireland.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... 5
INFORMATION AND SAFETY SIGNS USED IN THE MANUAL ....................................................... 5
PRECAUTIONARY LABELS ATTACHED TO THE INSTRUMENT .................................................... 6
CERTIFICATION MARKS ATTACHED TO THE INSTRUMENT ....................................................... 7
POTENTIAL SYSTEM SAFETY HAZARDS ................................................................................ 8
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.5
1.5
Ozone and Toxicity .........................................................................................................................9
First Aid Treatment .........................................................................................................................9
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...................................................................................... 10
PRÉCAUTIONS GÉNÉRALES DE SÉCURITÉ ........................................................................... 10
1.5.1
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.4
Electrical and Burn Precautions .................................................................................................. 11
Précautions relatives à l’électricité et aux brûlures ..................................................................... 11
Carrier Gas and Exhaust Gas Precautions ................................................................................. 12
Précautions relatives au gaz porteur et d'échappement ............................................................. 12
Chemical Precautions ................................................................................................................. 13
Précautions chimiques ................................................................................................................ 13
Sample Stream Precautions........................................................................................................ 14
Précautions relatives aux échantillons ........................................................................................ 15
SECTION 2
OPERATOR’S MANUAL ......................................................................... 16
2.1 SOFTWARE SCREENS AND SOFTWARE MENU DIAGRAM ............................................................ 16
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.2
Startup State................................................................................................................................ 18
System Status Messages ............................................................................................................ 18
Analysis Data Screen .................................................................................................................. 19
Analysis Graph Screen ................................................................................................................ 20
Reagent Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 20
Select Level Menu ....................................................................................................................... 21
Enter Password Menu ................................................................................................................. 21
OPERATION MENU ............................................................................................................ 22
2.2.1
2.2.2
Start Stop..................................................................................................................................... 22
Reagents Setup ........................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.3
Install New Reagents ......................................................................................................................... 24
Purge Reagents & Zero ..................................................................................................................... 25
System Range Data Screen ........................................................................................................ 25
Manual Program Menu ................................................................................................................ 26
Reaction Archive Screen ............................................................................................................. 27
Fault Archive Menu ..................................................................................................................... 27
Time & Date Menu ...................................................................................................................... 28
Contact Information ..................................................................................................................... 28
LCD Adjust .................................................................................................................................. 28
CALIBRATION MENU.......................................................................................................... 29
2.3.1
2.3.2
Zero Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 29
Span Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 31
SECTION 3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................. 34
SECTION 4
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... 37
4.1
BIOTECTOR MAJOR COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 37
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.2
Analysis Enclosure ...................................................................................................................... 37
Motherboard Enclosure ............................................................................................................... 40
BIOTECTOR OPERATION ................................................................................................... 42
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
BioTector Oxidation Method ........................................................................................................ 42
BioTector Sample Injection ......................................................................................................... 43
BioTector Oxygen Concentrator .................................................................................................. 45
BioTector Analysis Types ............................................................................................................ 47
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.2
TIC & TOC Analysis ........................................................................................................................... 47
TC Analysis........................................................................................................................................ 47
Page 2
4.2.4.3
VOC (POC) Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 48
SECTION 5
INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 49
5.1
5.2
BASIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 49
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 50
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.3
Analyzer Dimensions and Mounting ............................................................................................ 51
Wiring Power and Signal Terminals ............................................................................................ 53
Wiring External Power Disconnection Switches .......................................................................... 55
System Fuse Specifications ........................................................................................................ 57
AIR SUPPLY AND REAGENT CONNECTIONS......................................................................... 58
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
Air Supply Connection ................................................................................................................. 59
Reagent Connections .................................................................................................................. 60
SAMPLE, DRAIN AND EXHAUST CONNECTIONS ................................................................... 62
5.4.1
5.4.2
Sample Inlet Tube Position ......................................................................................................... 62
Drain and Exhaust Connections .................................................................................................. 64
SECTION 6
6.1
6.2
REAGENTS AND CALIBRATION STANDARDS.................................... 65
REAGENTS ....................................................................................................................... 65
CALIBRATION STANDARDS ................................................................................................ 66
SECTION 7
ANALYZER COMMISSIONING AND STARTUP .................................... 69
SECTION 8
MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................... 74
8.1
DIAGNOSTICS MENU.................................................................................................... 75
8.1.1
Process Test................................................................................................................................ 76
8.1.1.1
8.1.1.2
8.1.1.3
8.1.1.4
8.1.1.5
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Simulate ....................................................................................................................................... 85
Signal Simulate............................................................................................................................ 89
Data Output ................................................................................................................................. 91
8.1.4.1
8.1.4.2
8.1.4.3
8.1.4.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.2
Pressure Test .................................................................................................................................... 76
Flow Test ........................................................................................................................................... 77
Ozone Test ........................................................................................................................................ 78
Sample Pump Test ............................................................................................................................ 80
pH Test .............................................................................................................................................. 81
Send Reaction Archive ...................................................................................................................... 92
Send Fault Archive ............................................................................................................................ 95
Send Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 95
Send All Data ..................................................................................................................................... 95
Input/Output Status ..................................................................................................................... 96
Oxygen Controller Status ............................................................................................................ 97
Service ......................................................................................................................................... 98
COMMISSIONING MENU .............................................................................................. 99
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.3
Reaction Time ............................................................................................................................. 99
Sample Pump ............................................................................................................................ 100
Stream Program ........................................................................................................................ 100
COD/BOD/DW Program ............................................................................................................ 102
New Reagents Program ............................................................................................................ 103
Reagents Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 104
Autocal Program ........................................................................................................................ 105
4-20mA Program ....................................................................................................................... 105
Alarm Program .......................................................................................................................... 107
Data Program ........................................................................................................................ 108
Information ............................................................................................................................ 108
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU ............................................................................. 109
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
Analysis Mode ........................................................................................................................... 110
System Program ........................................................................................................................ 111
Calibration Data ......................................................................................................................... 116
Sequence Program ................................................................................................................... 116
8.3.4.1
8.3.4.2
8.3.4.3
8.3.4.4
8.3.4.5
8.3.5
Average Program ............................................................................................................................. 116
Zero Program................................................................................................................................... 117
Span Program.................................................................................................................................. 119
Reagents Purge ............................................................................................................................... 121
Pressure/Flow Test Program ........................................................................................................... 121
Output Devices .......................................................................................................................... 123
Page 3
8.3.5.1
8.3.5.2
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
8.3.11
8.3.12
8.3.13
8.3.14
8.3.15
8.3.16
System Outputs ............................................................................................................................... 123
Programmable Outputs .................................................................................................................... 125
Reaction Check ......................................................................................................................... 126
Result Integration ...................................................................................................................... 127
Fault Setup ................................................................................................................................ 128
Fault Status ............................................................................................................................... 131
CO2 Analyzer ........................................................................................................................ 132
Cooler Program ..................................................................................................................... 133
Ozone Destructor Program ................................................................................................... 134
Software Update ................................................................................................................... 135
Password .............................................................................................................................. 136
Language .............................................................................................................................. 136
Hardware Configuration ........................................................................................................ 136
SECTION 9
TROUBLESHOOTING OF SYSTEM FAULT, WARNING AND
NOTIFICATION EVENTS ................................................................................................ 137
9.1
9.2
9.3
BIOTECTOR FAULT EVENT EXPLANATION AND REMEDIAL ACTION ...................................... 137
BIOTECTOR W ARNING EVENT EXPLANATION AND REMEDIAL ACTION ................................. 141
BIOTECTOR NOTIFICATION EVENT EXPLANATION AND REMEDIAL ACTION .......................... 150
SECTION 10
10.1
10.2
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 151
WEEKLY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 151
SIX MONTH SERVICE ...................................................................................................... 152
SECTION 11
SYSTEM REPLACEMENT AND SPARE PARTS .................................. 156
SECTION 12
WARRANTY AND EXCLUSIONS .......................................................... 159
SECTION 13
APPENDICES ......................................................................................... 160
APPENDIX 1
APPENDIX 2
GLOSSARY OF TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................... 160
CONTACT INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 163
Page 4
Section 1
Safety Precautions
Please read this manual before unpacking, setting up, or operating the BioTector.
BioTector should only be used by qualified trained staff and for the purpose it is intended for. Do not use or
install this equipment in any way other than the methods specified in this manual. The procedures and
methods described in this manual are based on assuming the user have basic, fundamental background on
electronics, chemistry and analyzer equipment.
If the instructions in this manual are not followed, the operation and protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
1.1
Information and Safety Signs used in the Manual
When any supplementary information is required and if any hazards exist, the necessary information and
safety signs (Information, Caution, Warning and Danger) will be displayed for the corresponding section or
procedure in this manual.
Used to indicate supplementary information, to call attention to
recommendations, to simplify the operation and to guarantee the correct use
of the equipment.
Used when there is a danger of minor damage to the system if the user does
not follow precautions.
Caution
Used when there is a danger of minor injury or serious damage to the
system if the user does do not follow the precautions.
WARNING
Used when failure to observe a safety precaution may result in serious injury
or death.
DANGER
Page 5
1.2
Precautionary Labels Attached to the Instrument
The labels and tags attached to the instrument are summarized below. Please read all labels and tags
attached to the instrument. If not observed, personal injury or damage to the instrument could occur.
This symbol, when displayed on the instrument, indicates that the user
must gather the necessary operation and/or safety information given in the
instruction manual.
This symbol, when attached on an enclosure, indicates an existing risk of
electrical shock and/or electrocution. Only qualified personnel should open
such enclosures and work with hazardous voltages.
This symbol, when displayed on a component, identifies that the
component surface can be hot. When it is necessary to work with this
component, it should be handled with care.
This symbol, when noted on a product, illustrates the risk of chemical harm
due to its corrosive, acidic, caustic or solvent nature. Only qualified and
trained staff should handle such chemicals.
This symbol, when noted on an analyzer, illustrates the risk of the presence
of toxic ozone gas produced in the analyzer. Only qualified and trained staff
should work with this analyzer.
This symbol, when displayed on the instrument, indicates the presence of
devices sensitive to Electro-Static Discharge (ESD). Prior to any work with
such components, the individual should be grounded via an earth strap to
prevent any possible damage.
This symbol, when displayed on the product, indicates that protective eye
wear must be used during the maintenance or service of the equipment.
This symbol, when used on the product, identifies the location of the
protective earth (ground) connection.
Page 6
Electrical equipment marked with this symbol may not be disposed of in
European domestic or public disposal systems. Return old or end-of-life
equipment to the manufacturer for disposal at no charge to the user.
1.3
Certification Marks Attached to the Instrument
The standard certification marks attached to the instrument and their meanings are summarized below.
Additional certification marks if required for specific markets are at the back of this manual.
This mark, which stands for European Conformity "Conformité
Européene", indicates that “The instrument complies with the
European product directives, health, safety and
environmental protection legislations”.
Conforms to
ANSI/UL Std. 61010-1
Certified to
CAN/CSA Std. 61010-1
If these marks are displayed on the instrument, they indicate
that “This product has been tested to Safety Requirements
of Electrical Equipment for Measurements, Control and
Laboratory use; Part 1: General Requirements of ANSI/UL
61010-1 and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 61010-1”. Intertek ETL listed
mark, which stands for Electrical Testing Laboratories, identifies
that the product has been tested by Intertek, found in
compliance with accepted national standards, and it meets the
minimal requirements required for sale or distribution.
Page 7
1.4
Potential System Safety Hazards
The potential safety hazards, which are associated with a running BioTector system, are as follows:
•
•
•
Electrical hazards
Potentially hazardous chemicals
Oxygen gas and components generating Ozone gas
Maintenance and operation should not be carried out unless personnel have been fully
trained in the operation of the BioTector.
Prior to working on the inside of the analyzer, the technician should be grounded via an
earth strap.
Caution
Please read the instructions in this manual carefully before installing or starting the BioTector.
The manufacturer cannot accept liability for damages due to non-observance of this manual. Use of spare
parts not supplied by the manufacturer will invalidate the warranty. If the equipment is used in a manner not
specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. The manufacturer
shall not be liable for omissions or errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The information contained herein is protected by copyright. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation of any
part of this manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Product names mentioned herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Where manuals are translated into several languages, the source language text is considered as the original.
Page 8
1.4.1 Ozone and Toxicity
Ozone is found in gaseous form as a natural ingredient of the earth's atmosphere. Some of the chemical and
physical properties of ozone are as follows:
Terms
Molecule Weight
Boiling Point
Melting Point
Properties of Ozone (O3)
47.9982 g/g-mol
-119 0.3 °C
-192.7 0.2 °C
Exposure to even low concentrations of ozone can be damaging to delicate nasal, bronchial and pulmonary
membrane. Symptoms of acute ozone toxification appear at a concentration of about 1 ppm by volume. The
type and severity of symptoms depend on the concentration and duration of exposure. In mild cases and in
the early phases of severe cases, symptoms will include one or more of the following:
• Irritation or burning of the eyes, nose or throat
• Lassitude
• Frontal headache
• Sensation of sub-sternal pressure
• Constriction or oppression
• Acid taste in mouth
• Anorexia
In more severe cases, the symptoms may include dyspnoea, cough, choking sensation, tachycardia, vertigo,
lowering of blood pressure, severe cramping, chest pain, and generalized body pain. Pulmonary oedema may
develop with delayed onset, usually one or more hours after exposure.
Following severe acute ozone toxification, recovery is slow. In the few severe human cases reported, 10 -14
days of hospitalization were required. In these cases, minimal residual symptoms were present for as long as
9 months, but all cases eventually recovered completely.
The 1983 ACGIH has recommended a Threshold Limit Value (TLV) of 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m3) for ozone. The
safe level for short human exposure to concentrations of ozone in excess of 0.1 ppm (Threshold Limit Value)
is not known with certainty. The atmospheric concentration immediately hazardous to life is likewise not
known, but inhalation of 50 ppm for 30 minutes would probably be fatal. The odor threshold of ozone for a
normal person is 0.01 - 0.02 ppm by volume in air.
1.4.2 First Aid Treatment
Move the victim to an uncontaminated atmosphere. Control restlessness and pain by the administration of
sedatives and anodynes orally. Severe cases may require subcutaneous injections of small doses of
meperidine hydrochloride (Demerol) for relief of pain. Give oxygen inhalation by facemask when the acute
symptoms have subsided. Severe cases require hospitalization since deferred pulmonary oedema may
develop.
Page 9
1.5
General Safety Precautions
Please pay attention to all caution, warning and danger statements at all times. Non-observance of the safety
instructions can result in serious personal injury, death or damage to the equipment. Therefore observe the
following:
▪
▪
▪
▪
▪
1.5
Only engineers trained by the manufacturer should carry out maintenance on the BioTector.
The power supplies contain capacitors that are charged to hazardous voltages. After disconnecting
the main power, allow a minimum of one minute for discharge before opening the control section.
Never wash or spray the system with water. Do not allow water to enter the interior.
Protect the system from one-sided heat radiation, direct sunlight and vibration. System must be
installed in a dry, dust-free room. Special precautions are required in environments with corrosive
gases, vapors or explosion risk.
Please do not place anything on top of the system.
Précautions générales de sécurité
Prière d’être toujours attentif à toutes les notices de prudence, d’avertissement ou de danger. Le non respect
des instructions de sécurité peut engendrer la blessure grave d’individus, leur décès ou la dégradation du
matériel. Pour ces raisons, prière d’observer les règles suivantes:
▪
▪
▪
▪
▪
Seuls les ingénieurs formés par le fabricant doivent réaliser des travaux de maintenance sur le
BioTector.
L’alimentation électrique contient des condensateurs qui sont chargés à des tensions dangereuses.
Après avoir débranché l’alimentation électrique, attendre au moins une minute pour permettre la
décharge avant d'ouvrir le boîtier de commande.
Ne jamais laver ou arroser l’appareil avec de l’eau. Ne pas laisser de l’eau pénétrer à l’intérieur.
Protéger l’appareil des radiations de chaleur sur un seul côté, des rayons directs du soleil et des
vibrations. L’appareil doit être installé dans une pièce sèche et sans poussière. Il est nécessaire de
prendre des précautions particulières dans les environnements contenant des vapeurs ou gaz
corrosifs ou ceux à risque d’explosion.
Prière de ne rien poser sur le dessus de l'appareil.
Page 10
1.5.1 Electrical and Burn Precautions
BioTector contains electrical components operating under high voltages.
Contact may result in electric shock and severe or fatal injury.
DANGER
During system installation, maintenance or servicing:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Isolate the system power lines before starting any work in the electronic enclosure.
All electrical work should be carried out by qualified electrical personnel only.
Comply with all local and national regulations when working with electrical connections.
Make sure the system is properly earthed (grounded) before switching on.
It is required to connect the mains through an external isolator (2-pole disconnection switch), and if
possible connect the mains through an earth leakage circuit breaker.
When working with hot surfaces, use protective gloves and handle the components with care.
1.5.1 Précautions relatives à l’électricité et aux brûlures
BioTector contient des composants électriques qui fonctionnent à des tensions
élevées. Un contact peut engendrer un choc électrique et des blessures graves
ou mortelles.
DANGER
À l’installation de l’appareil, sa maintenance ou son entretien:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Isoler les fils électriques de l’appareil avant de commencer tout travail dans le boîtier électronique.
Seul le personnel électricien qualifié est habilité à effectuer tous travaux d’électricité.
Se conformer aux règlementations locales et nationales pour tout travail sur un branchement
électrique.
Avant de l’allumer, veiller à la bonne mise à la terre de l’appareil.
Le branchement sur le courant secteur doit obligatoirement se faire par l'intermédiaire d'un
interrupteur sectionneur externe (interrupteur bipolaire), et prévoyez si possible un disjoncteur
différentiel.
Utiliser des gants de protection pour les travaux sur les surfaces très chaudes et prendre soin en
manipulant les composants.
Page 11
1.5.2 Carrier Gas and Exhaust Gas Precautions
BioTector uses oxygen (O2) gas as the carrier gas during its operation. The oxygen gas must be free of
carbon dioxide (CO2) and nitrogen (N2) gases. The average rate of oxygen consumption in BioTector is 29 l/h
(483 ml/min). Carbon dioxide filtered air, carbon dioxide and nitrogen contaminated oxygen gas are not
suitable for BioTector TOC analyzer. When handling oxygen:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The same precautions, which are required for any high pressure or compressed gas system, must be
taken to avoid accidents.
Comply with all local and national regulations and/or manufacturer's recommendations and guidelines
when working with oxygen.
If oxygen cylinders are used, they must be transferred safely using appropriate equipment (e.g. carts,
hand trucks etc.)
If oxygen cylinders are used, they should be labeled clearly for identification and well secured for
storage and transport.
Avoid the use of extensive number of adaptors and couplers.
Do not allow oxygen to come in direct contact with grease, oil, fat, and other combustible materials. If
uncertain how to handle oxygen cylinders and high concentration oxygen, contact your local oxygen
manufacturer.
If oxygen concentrator is used, take precautions to avoid a fire in the area of the concentrator, install
the concentrator only in a well ventilated area and comply with all local and national regulations.
Vent waste gases to atmosphere or to a well ventilated area making the necessary connections on system
exhaust. Under normal operating conditions, waste gases will contain oxygen, traces of carbon dioxide and
the traces of volatiles/gases which may exist in the sample stream. Under abnormal conditions, the waste
gases may contain traces of ozone.
1.5.2 Précautions relatives au gaz porteur et d'échappement
Pour son fonctionnement, BioTector emploie de l’oxygène (O 2) comme gaz porteur. L’oxygène ne doit
comporter aucun gaz carbonique (CO2) ni d’azote (N2). Le taux moyen de consommation d’oxygène du
BioTector est de 29L/heure (483 ml/min). L’analyseur BioTector TOC ne tolère pas l’air filtré de gaz
carbonique ni l'oxygène contaminé de gaz carbonique et d'azote. À la manipulation de l’oxygène:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Afin d’éviter les accidents, prendre les mêmes précautions que pour tout appareil à haute pression ou
gaz comprimé.
Pour toute opération avec de l’oxygène, se conformer aux règlementations locales et nationales et/ou
aux recommandations et consignes du fabricant.
S’ils sont employés, les cylindres d’oxygène doivent être transportés en toute sécurité à l’aide du
matériel approprié (chariots, diables, etc.)
S’ils sont employés, les cylindres d’oxygène doivent être clairement étiquetés pour en permettre
l’identification et bien arrimés pour leur stockage et leur transport.
Éviter d’utiliser un nombre élevé d’adaptateurs et de dispositifs de couplage.
Ne pas laisser l’oxygène entrer en contact direct avec de la graisse, de l’huile, des matières grasses
ou d’autres matières combustibles. Veuillez contacter votre fabricant local d’oxygène si vous avez
des doutes sur la manière de manipuler les cylindres d’oxygène et l’oxygène de haute concentration.
Dans le cas où un concentrateur est employé, prendre les précautions nécessaires pour éviter un
incendie dans la zone du concentrateur, n’installer le concentrateur que dans un endroit bien ventilé
et se conformer aux règlementations locales et nationales.
Évacuer les gaz usés dans l’atmosphère ou dans un endroit bien ventilé en réalisant les branchements
voulus sur l'échappement de l’appareil. Dans des conditions normales de fonctionnement, les gaz usés
contiennent de l’oxygène, des traces de gaz carbonique et des traces de composants volatiles/gaz qui
peuvent être présents dans l’échantillon. Dans des conditions anormales, les gaz usés peuvent contenir des
traces d’ozone.
Page 12
1.5.3 Chemical Precautions
A number of chemicals and compounds to be used with BioTector are listed in Section 6
Reagents
and Calibration Standards. Some of these compounds are harmful, corrosive, acidic and oxidizing.
Appropriate precautions must be taken when handling these chemicals or solutions prepared from these
chemicals.
Physical contact with these chemicals and inhalation of any vapors must be minimized using appropriate
safety equipment.
1.5.3 Précautions chimiques
La liste de la Section 6 Réactifs et Standards de Calibration (Section 6
Reagents and Calibration
Standards) énumère un certain nombre de produits chimiques et composés à utiliser avec BioTector.
Certains de ces composés sont nocifs, corrosifs, acides et oxydants. Il est essentiel de prendre les
précautions appropriées lors de la manipulation de ces produits chimiques ou des solutions dont ils sont la
base.
Il est essentiel d’employer l’équipement de sécurité approprié afin de minimiser le contact direct avec ces
produits chimiques et l’inhalation de toutes vapeurs.
Page 13
1.5.4 Sample Stream Precautions
The user is responsible to establish the potential hazard associated with each sample stream. Necessary
precautions must be taken, to avoid physical contact with any harmful sample stream, which may contain
chemical or biological hazards.
System components and their composition, which come in contact with the sample liquid and possible volatile
gases from the sample, are tabulated in table 1 below. If there are suspected compatibility issues between the
sample stream and BioTector components, please contact the manufacturer or the distributor.
Table 1 System components and their composition
Component
Material
Tubing
PFA (Per-fluoro-alkoxy)
Vinyl
Reinforced Silicon
Reinforced PVC (Poly-vinyl-chloride)
PFA (Per-fluoro-alkoxy)
Stainless Steel (SS-316)
PVDF (Poly-vinylidene-flouride)
Brass
EMPP (Elastomer-modified-poly-propylene)
PP (Poly-propylene)
HDPE (High-density-poly-ethylene)
EMPP (Elastomer-modified poly-propylene)
Viton / FKM (Fluoro-elastomer)
Fittings
Pump Tubing
Connectors
Connector & Valve Tubing
Sample Valve
Reactor
Valve Seals
Oxidized Sample Catch-pot/Cleaning Vessel
NDIR CO2 Analyzer
NDIR CO2 Analyzer Lens
PEEK (Poly-ether-ether-ketone)
PVDF (Poly-vinylidene-flouride)
Stainless Steel (SS-316)
EMPP (Elastomer-modified poly-propylene)
Hastelloy (C-276)
Stainless Steel (SS-316)
PFA (Per-fluoro-alkoxy)
PTFE (Poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene)
Kalrez / FFKM (Perfluoro-elastomer)
Viton / FKM (Fluoro-elastomer)
NBR (Nitrile-butadiene-rubber)
Borosilicate Glass
Hastelloy (C-276)
Stainless Steel (SS-316)
Sapphire
Page 14
1.5.4 Précautions relatives aux échantillons
L’usager assume la responsabilité d’établir le danger possible que représente chaque échantillon. Il est
essentiel de prendre les précautions voulues afin d’éviter le contact physique avec tout échantillon nocif qui
pourrait présenter un danger chimique ou biologique.
Le tableau 1 ci-dessous présente les composants de l’analyseur (et leur composition) qui entrent en contact
avec l’échantillon liquide et les éventuels gaz volatiles émanant de l’échantillon. Si vous soupçonnez des
problèmes de compatibilité entre l’échantillon et les composants BioTector, veuillez contacter le distributeur
ou le fabricant.
Tableau 1 Composants de l’analyseur et leur composition
Composant
Matière
Tuyauterie
PFA (perfluoroalkoxy)
Vinyle
Silicone renforcé
PVC renforcé (poly-chlorure de vinyle)
PFA (perfluoroalkoxy)
Acier inoxydable (SS-316)
PVDF (polyfluorure de polyvinylidène)
Laiton
PPMOD (polypropylène modifié par élastomère)
PP (polypropylène)
HDPE (polyéthylène haute densité)
PPMOD (polypropylène modifié par élastomère)
Viton / FKM (élastomère fluoré)
Raccords
Tuyauterie de la pompe
Connecteurs
Tuyauterie des connecteurs & vannes
Vanne d’entrée de l’échantillon
Réacteur
Joints des vannes
Bac de récupération/récipient de nettoyage de
l’échantillon oxydé
Analyseur infrarouge de CO2
Lentille de l’analyseur infrarouge de CO2
PEEK (polyéther éther cétone)
PVDF (polyfluorure de polyvinylidène)
Acier inoxydable (SS-316)
PPMOD (polypropylène modifié par élastomère)
Hastelloy (C-276)
Acier inoxydable (SS-316)
PFA (perfluoroalkoxy)
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene)
Kalrez / FFKM (élastomère perfluoré)
Viton / FKM (élastomère fluoré)
NBR (caoutchouc nitrile butadiène)
Verre borosilicaté
Hastelloy (C-276)
Acier inoxydable (SS-316)
Saphir
Page 15
Section 2
Operator’s Manual
2.1 Software Screens and Software Menu Diagram
The BioTector is equipped with a built-in microprocessor, which has been programmed to enable the user to
control the instrument using just six buttons of its membrane keypad. By pressing the appropriate button, the
user can move through the various levels of the software menu.
The functions of the 6 keys on the membrane keypad are described below:
The ESCAPE [ ❖❖ , , ] key, which returns user to the previous screen, can also be used to cancel
programming entries. If the ESCAPE key is pressed for longer than 1 second the user returns to the main
menu.
The LEFT [
BioTector.
❖ , ] and RIGHT [ , ] arrow keys are used for numerical entries and programming the
The UP [ ,
BioTector.
] and DOWN [ , ] arrow keys are used for numerical entries and programming the
The ENTER [ , √ ] key, which advances user to the next screen, is also used to enter programmed
settings in the BioTector.
The symbols used on BioTector LCD screen and their meanings are as follows:
<
Selector. Used to designate the menu item being selected.
*
Highlighter. Used to highlight an active or ongoing function of the BioTector.
_
Blinking Cursor. Used to indicate current user position when setting changes are
being made.
There are three main menu levels in BioTector in addition to the analysis graph, analysis data and reagent
status screens:
•
Level 1 – Operation: This level controls the basic operation of the BioTector and allows access to
the archives.
•
Level 2 – Calibration: This level allows the user to run zero and span calibration cycles.
•
Level 3 – Maintenance: This level allows the user to test the individual components of the BioTector
for diagnostics, to download data, to program the software functions and to program the system
specific settings in the BioTector.
Page 16
Software Menu Diagram
Page 17
2.1.1 Startup State
When the BioTector is powered up, its LCD screen will automatically display the Analysis Data screen after a
delay of 60 seconds.
By pressing the ESCAPE key the user moves from the Analysis Data screen to the Analysis Graph screen.
Pressing the ENTER key on the Analysis Graph screens brings the user back to the Analysis Data screen.
Pressing ENTER key on the Analysis Data screen will bring up the Select Level screen, from where the user
can select the desired menu level using the UP or DOWN and ENTER keys.
Entry to each menu level can be controlled by numerical passwords. If the passwords are not set, pressing
the enter key will bring the user directly to the sub menu screen of the selected level. If the system has been
set up with passwords, the Password menu will appear and the password must be entered before access to
the selected level is allowed.
In all cases, pressing the ESCAPE key will return the user to the previous screen.
2.1.2 System Status Messages
The system status messages are displayed on the top left hand side of the Analysis Data and Reagent Status
screens. On most other screens, only the screen name is displayed in this location.
System status messages are displayed in the following priority:
1. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE – the BioTector is in Maintenance mode, activated by the maintenance
switch.
2. SYSTEM FAULT – There is a fault on the BioTector. System is stopped.
3. SYSTEM WARNING – There is a warning on the BioTector. System is running.
4. SYSTEM NOTE – There is a notification on the BioTector. System is running.
5. SYSTEM CALIBRATION – The BioTector is calibrating. This could be Span Calibration, Span Check,
Zero Calibration or Zero Check.
6. System operation status. This could be one of either:
▪ SYSTEM RUNNING – system is running.
▪ SYSTEM STOPPED – system has been stopped by a fault or from the keypad.
▪ REMOTE STANDBY – system has been put into standby mode remotely. System has stopped
analyzing.
The BioTector time and date is displayed on the top right side of each screen. When a
fault/warning/notification is logged in the system, a FAULT LOGGED message will alternate with the time/date
in this location until the fault/warning/notification has been corrected.
Changing most system settings are prevented when the BioTector is running.
Page 18
2.1.3 Analysis Data Screen
B I O T E C T O R
R U N N I N G
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
0 9 : 1 3 : 0 2
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
T I C & T O C
S T R E A M 2
T O C
1
2 6 6 s
3 6 0 s
R
R
R
R
R
R
E
E
E
A
E
E
A
A
A
N
A
A
C
C
C
G
C
C
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
S
S
S
S
S
C
1
2
3
4
5
F
√
√
√
x
x
T I C m g C
1 3 0
3
7
1 0
1 4
0
E
9
9
8
8
8
8
A
:
:
:
:
:
:
C
0
0
5
4
4
3
T
7
1
5
9
3
7
I
:
:
:
:
:
:
O
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
2
2
2
2
2
2
R
1
1
1
1
1
1
E
2
2
2
2
2
2
S
-
U
0
0
0
0
0
0
L
9
9
9
9
9
9
T
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
T
T
T
E
T
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
I O N
I O N
I O N
S T A R T
T Y P E
P H A S E
I O N
I O N
T I M E
D U R A T I O N
/
.
.
.
.
.
.
l
0
6
2
7
3
9
T O C m g
5 4 0
3
7
1 0
1 4
7
C
.
.
.
.
.
.
/ l
0
6
2
7
3
9
The Analysis Data screen is the default display screen on the BioTector for carbon analyses (TIC, TOC, TC,
VOC) in mgC/l, COD & BOD results in mgO/l, and Drinking Water parameters, which are REMOVAL in %,
and RESULT in FAIL/PASS condition depending on the analysis type and specific configuration settings.
When the user moves through the various levels of the software menu, BioTector returns to this screen
automatically after 15 minutes if there is no further activity on the membrane keypad.
This screen gives information on:
- The Reaction Start time.
- The Reaction Type, for example a TIC & TOC reaction, TC reaction, Cleaning Reaction.
- The Reaction Phase, for example if the reaction is currently in the TIC, Base Oxidation, TOC phase.
- The operation Range (e.g. Range 1, 2 or 3) the BioTector is using to carry out its analysis.
- The Reaction Time, which is the elapsed time (seconds) since the analysis start.
- The Reaction Duration, which is the overall duration (seconds) of the analysis.
The Analysis Data screen also has an archive of the last 25 reactions. The most recent six reactions are
shown on the screen. In order to access the remaining reactions, use the DOWN or RIGHT keys to scroll
down, use the LEFT or UP keys to scroll up.
Each reaction record in the reaction archive contains:
- Start Time - reaction start time.
- Date - reaction date.
- Record Type, using the prefixes below:
S1 to S3
– reactions from stream 1 to stream 3.
M1 to M3 – reactions from manual sample stream 1 to manual stream 3.
√
– sample sensor detected the sample or there is no significant quantity of air bubbles in the
stream/manual grab sample lines.
x
– sample sensor detected no sample or there is significant quantity of air bubbles in the
stream/manual grab sample lines. See Sample Status in section 8.3.8 Fault Setup for
details.
RS
– remote standby reaction.
ZC
– zero calibration reaction.
ZK
– zero check reaction.
ZM
– manual zero adjust.
SC
– span calibration reaction.
SK
– span check reaction.
SM
– manual span factor adjust.
A1 to A3
– 24 hours average result from stream 1 to stream 3.
- Analysis Results – analysis results according to the analysis type (e.g. TIC, TOC in mgC/l).
Page 19
2.1.4 Analysis Graph Screen
1 0 1 . 5 [ k P a ]
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
T I C m g u
1 2 . 4
9 5 6 C O 2
T O C m g u
1 5 6 . 4
4 3 5 6 C O 2
1 0 . 0 l / h
0 s
2 6 C
1 2 0 s
5 6 C O 2 i
2 4 0 s
1 2 C O 2 z
3 6 0 s
2 6 5 s
The Analysis Graph screen gives information on the current analysis in progress, and allows the user to
monitor the progression of the analysis. This screen gives information on:
The current atmospheric pressure, measured in kPa (e.g. 101.5 kPa).
The milligram per liter un-calibrated (mgu) data from the analysis, for example TICmgu or TOCmgu
without any compensation for atmospheric pressure.
The height of the CO2 peaks in each phase of the reaction (e.g. 956ppm CO2).
The current MFC flow in l/h (e.g. 10.0 l/h).
The temperature of the analyzer in °C (e.g. 26°C).
The CO2 instantaneous value (e.g. 56ppm CO2i) and the CO2 zero value (e.g. 12ppm CO2z) of the
reaction.
The elapsed time (e.g. 265s) since the start of the analysis.
2.1.5 Reagent Status Screen
B I O T E C T O R
A C I D
B A S E
N O T E :
R U N N I N G
M O N I T O R
M O N I T O R
D A Y S
L E F T
I S
B A S E D
S Y S T E M
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 9 . 0 l
1 9 . 0 l
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
~ 2 3 9
~ 2 3 9
D A Y S
D A Y S
A N
E S T I M A T E
C U R R E N T
U S E
If the Reagent Status screen has been activated, the estimated number of days left for each reagent type is
shown on the display.
If the reagents run low, a LOW REAGENTS fault is activated. This fault has to be cleared by resetting the
reagent level in the Install New Reagents menu.
Note that the LOW REAGENTS fault can be set as a warning (where the common fault relay will activate) or a
notification, in which case a special programmable relay is required to signal the LOW REAGENTS condition.
Page 20
2.1.6 Select Level Menu
S E L E C T
1 <
2
3
L E V E L
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
O P E R A T I O N
C A L I B R A T I O N
M A I N T E N A N C E
The Select Level screen allows the user to access the operation, calibration and maintenance menus.
1. Operation. This menu gives access to the basic operation of the BioTector and allows access to the
archives. The level can be password protected using the Password menu.
2. Calibration. This menu allows the user to run zero and span calibration cycles. The level can be
password protected using the Password menu.
3. Maintenance. This menu allows the user to test the individual components of the BioTector for
diagnostics, to download data, to program the software functions and to program the system specific
settings in the BioTector. The sub menus in this level can be password protected using the Password
menu.
2.1.7 Enter Password Menu
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
E N T E R
P A S S W O R D
O P E R A T I O N
[
S E C U R I T Y
1 2 3 4
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
F O R
D O M A I N
]
The BioTector has separate passwords for all levels/security domains, which are operation, calibration
diagnostics, commissioning, system configuration and hardware configuration.
These passwords are programmable, and if a password has been set up for a particular level in Password
menu (see Section 8.3.14
Password for details), then it must be entered before the BioTector will grant
access to the password-protected security domains.
Use of a higher menu level password also allows access to lower levels/domains.
Page 21
2.2
Operation Menu
Operation Menu Diagram
Operation menu allows the user to start and stop the analyzer. Menus related to system operation are also
accessed using this menu.
2.2.1 Start Stop
The user can Start or Stop the BioTector using the Start Stop menu.
1. Remote Standby. Remote Standby is an optional function, which is activated from Input 2 (by default) on
the Power and Input/Output Board (e.g. from a flow switch). A “REMOTE STANDBY” message is displayed
on the top left corner of the main Analysis Data screen to indicate that the BioTector is in remote standby
state. When remote standby signal is activated, the BioTector stops analyzing. All menu access and
operational functions remain as for BioTector normal running state. The BioTector runs one standby
reaction every 24 hours, at the time programmed for the Pressure/Flow Test (at 08:15 AM by default).
Sample is not taken during the remote standby reaction (only acid and base reagents are used). This
reaction is tagged as “RS” (Remote Standby) in the system reaction archive. The 4-20mA signal or other
output devices are not updated. When remote standby signal is deactivated, the BioTector starts analyzing.
When remote standby signal is activated, the “Finish & Stop” or “Emergency Stop” must be selected before
using such functions as Install New Reagents, Zero and Span Calibrations, Process Tests etc. If the
BioTector is stopped using the “Finish & Stop” or “Emergency Stop” functions or automatically by a system
fault, it will not be possible to start the BioTector by the removal of the remote standby signal. The “Start”
function must be used to re-start the BioTector. When BioTector is started while the remote standby signal
is activated, BioTector goes into remote standby state. The manual grab sample analysis can be carried out
normally using the Manual Program menu when the BioTector is in remote standby state.
Maintenance should only be carried out when “SYSTEM STOPPED” message
is displayed on the top left corner of the main Analysis Data screen or when
the system is powered down. When “REMOTE STANDBY” or “SYSTEM
RUNNING” message is displayed on the screen, stop the BioTector using the
“Finish & Stop” or “Emergency Stop” function.
Caution
Page 22
2. Start. This function starts the BioTector. When BioTector is started, the multi-stream operation sequence (if
programmed) is reset. BioTector performs Ozone Purge, Pressure/Flow Test, Reactor Purge and Analyzer
Purge sequences automatically before starting its analysis.
• Ozone Purge sequence purges any residual ozone through the ozone destructor.
• Pressure/Flow Test sequence confirm that there is no gas leak and there is no gas flow
restriction in the BioTector.
• Reactor Purge sequence purges any liquid from the reactor through the Reactor Valve.
• Analyzer Purge sequence purges any CO2 gas from the CO2 Analyzer through the Exhaust
Valve.
An “*” is displayed to let the operator know the function has been activated. If there is a fault in the system,
it will not be possible to start the analyzer until the fault has been rectified.
3. Finish & Stop. When this function is activated from the keyboard, the BioTector stops as soon as its
present reaction is completed. An “*” is displayed to let the operator know the function has been activated.
4. Emergency Stop. When this function is activated the BioTector cancels the execution of the present
reaction and quickly stops operation after the Ozone Purge, Reactor Purge and CO 2 Analyzer Purge
sequences. An “*” is displayed to let the operator know the function has been activated. The Emergency
Stop has highest priority, and always overrules the “Finish & Stop” function.
Quick Startup Function: During maintenance, system testing etc. it may be
necessary to quickly start and stop the BioTector to check various parameters.
Pressing the ENTER key for the “Start”, when the RIGHT ARROW key is also
pressed, bypasses the Pressure/Flow Test sequence, ensuring a quick startup.
When the quick startup function is used, system will log a “28_NO PRESSURE
TEST” warning in the fault archive and will start operation. The same warning will
also be logged, when the BioTector is started from the Reagents Setup, Manual
Program and Calibration menus using this function.
Page 23
2.2.2 Reagents Setup
This menu allows the user to access the Reagent menus.
1. Install New Reagents. Menu used to install and prime the reagents in the BioTector. Any “85_Reagents
Low” and “20_No Reagents” warnings and notifications can also be reset in this menu.
2. Purge Reagents & Zero. Menu used to purge the reagents, and carryout a zero calibration cycle.
2.2.2.1
Install New Reagents
I N S T A L L
N E W
C O N F I R M
1 <
2
3
4
7
1 0
1 2
N E
R
N E
R
N E
T O
S T
R E A G E N T S
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
T H E
F O L L O W I N G :
W
A C I D
E S E T
A C
W
B A S E
E S E T
B A
W
Z E R O
C
2 0 0 m g
A R T
N E W
C
I
C
S
W
C
O
D
O
E
A
,
R
N N
M
N N
M
T E
T I
E A
E
O
E
O
R
C
G
C
N
C
N
T
I
T
I
(
5
E N
E
T
E
T
D
0
T
D
O
D
O
I
m
R
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
3 5 0 m g / l M n S O 4 . H 2 O
1 9 . 0 l
~ 2 3 9
D A Y S
R
W )
g C
C Y C
1
C
C
L
9 . 0 l
~ 2 3 9
O N N E C T E D
O N N E C T E D
E
D A Y S
N O T E :
B I O T E C T O R
W I L L
S T O P
W H E N
T H E
N E W
R E A G E N T S
C Y C L E
I S
C O M P L E T E
The install new reagents procedure is an automatic procedure for installing new reagents, setting the zero
offset by Zero Calibration cycle, setting the reaction check levels and checking the span by Span Calibration
or Span Check cycles. Span Calibration or Span Check cycles are part of the Install New reagents sequence
if SPAN CALIBRATION or SPAN CHECK is activated in New Reagents Program menu. The basic Zero
Check/Calibration and Span Check/Calibration parameters (operation ranges, number of reactions, standard
solution concentrations etc.) are programmed in Zero Calibration and Span Calibration menus respectively
(see Section 2.3
Calibration Menu for details). The comprehensive Zero Check/Calibration and Span
Check/Calibration parameters are programmed in Zero Program and Span Program menus respectively (see
Section 8.3.4.2 Zero Program and 8.3.4.3
Span Program for details).
To run the Install New Reagents cycle, the BioTector must be stopped. Confirm that all or the corresponding
new reagents have been installed on the BioTector, for instance for acid reagent, select New Acid Connected,
and press the ENTER key. A tick mark will appear as confirmation that the new acid has been connected.
Note that when one or more reagent volumes are updated in Reagents Monitor menu, system automatically
resets the new reagents volumes in this menu and also updates the figures displayed in the main Reagents
Status screen.
All reagents volumes can be reset while system is running. This function allows the user to top up the
reagents without stopping the system. However, when acid and/or base reagents are replaced or topped up,
system requires a new Zero Calibration cycle. A “ZERO CALIBRATION REQUIRED” warning will be
displayed on the screen when RESET ACID MONITOR and/or RESET BASE MONITOR are selected.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended to stop the BioTector and activate the Start New Reagent Cycle or to
run the Zero Calibration cycle using the Zero Calibration menu. If DI Water is used during the Zero
Calibration/Check cycles (see ZERO WATER in section 8.3.4.2 Zero Program for details), and when “NEW
ZERO WATER (DIW) CONNECTED” message is displayed in this menu, it is important that Zero Water (DI
Water) is connected to BioTector’s Zero Water port or Manual/Calibration port (if these ports are not available,
connect DI Water to Sample 1 port) before the Install New Reagent cycle is started. Failure to do so may
have an impact on system zero response and the analysis results.
Page 24
When all or the necessary reagents have been confirmed to be connected and reset in this menu, and when
Start New Reagent Cycle is selected, the Install New Reagents cycle will be executed. It is the responsibility
of the user to make sure that all reagent volumes are programmed correctly in Reagents Monitor menu, the
reset of the reagents monitoring are carried out correctly in Install New Reagents menu and finally if
necessary the Zero Calibration cycle is activated either with the Start New Reagent Cycle function in Install
New Reagents menu or with the Run Zero Calibration function in Zero Calibration menu.
The Install New Reagents cycle consists of the following steps:
1. Reagent Purge: System purges and fills all reagent lines with the new reagents.
2. Zero Calibration: The Zero Adjust (zero offset) level is set for all analysis ranges, and the Reaction
Check level for TOC is updated (if the CO2 LEVEL is programmed as AUTO in Reaction Check
menu).
3. If Span Calibration or Span Check is activated in New Reagents Program menu, a Span Calibration
or Span Check is carried out.
Once the procedure is completed the BioTector either stops or returns online, depending on the programmed
setting of AUTOMATIC RE-START in New Reagents Program menu (see Section 8.2.5 New
Reagents
Program for details).
2.2.2.2
Purge Reagents & Zero
The Purge Reagents & Zero function is an automatic procedure to purge the reagents, to set the zero offset
and to set the reaction check levels in the BioTector. The program settings for the Reagent Purge are set up
in the Reagents Purge menu.
1. Purge Reagents & Zero. This option allows the user to run the Purge Reagents & Zero cycle.
2.2.3 System Range Data Screen
This menu displays the system specific, factory calibrated, analysis range data for all measured components
(e.g. TIC, TOC, TC). BioTector can be calibrated with up to 3 analysis ranges for each measured component.
When a specific component of a sample (e.g. TOC) is measured at a specific range (e.g. Range 2), the
analysis of any other components (e.g. TIC etc.) of the sample are also carried out at the same analysis
range.
Page 25
2.2.4 Manual Program Menu
M A N U A L
1
1
1
1
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
▼
P R O G R A M
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
R
R
R
R
U
U
E
E
N
A F T E R
N E X T
R E A C T I O N
N
A F T E R
T U R N
T O
O N - L I N E
S A M P L I N G
S E T
M A N U A L
P R O G R A M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
1
2
3
-
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
4
4
4
-
-
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
0 0 : 0 0
Y E S
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
1
3
2
-
Manual Program menu allows the user to run system in manual operation mode in order to analyze grab
samples/standards or a sequence of samples/standards manually. This is achieved by one or a set of Manual
Valves installed in the system. The manual analysis sequence can be started at the end of the current
reaction, or at a time set by the user. When the manual sequence is complete, the system can be
programmed to return online automatically. Note that all pressure/flow tests, zero or span cycles are
interrupted by the manual operation mode. The Sample Pump reverse operation is also disabled during the
manual operation mode by default, unless a Manual Bypass Valve is installed in the system and the
REVERSE time is programmed for the corresponding Manual Valve in Sample Pump menu. All items in this
menu can be modified when the BioTector is running unless:
- No Manual Valves have been defined in the Output Devices menu.
- The manual mode is currently running.
- The manual mode is scheduled to start when the current reaction is completed.
Note that the Manual mode always starts at the first programmed valve, and works its way down the
programmed sequence.
1. Run After Next Reaction. To start the manual operation mode sequence after the next reaction the
BioTector is currently running, press the ENTER key at this menu item. An “*” will indicate that this
function has been selected. If the BioTector is stopped, then the Manual mode will start immediately. To
deactivate this function before the manual operation mode has started, press the ENTER key again, or
activate an alternative function. In systems built with the remote control of Manual Program option, the
remote signal (Manual Mode Trigger from Input 7) activates the Run After Next Reaction function.
2. Run After 00:00. Similar to menu option 1 above, but the manual operation mode starts after the
programmed time.
3. Return to On-line Sampling. This menu item allows the user to specify whether the BioTector should
stop (with NO setting) or return to online monitoring (with YES setting) when the manual operation
sequence is complete.
4. Reset Manual Program. Use this function to reset all the programmed settings to their default values.
6. - 30. Manual. In order to analyze one or a number of samples/standards using the manual operation mode,
first connect the sample/standard to the manual port/s outside the BioTector. Then, select the
corresponding Manual Valve in this menu (the first setting). Then, enter the number of samples (number
of analysis reactions) to be taken through each Manual Valve (the second setting). Finally select the
correct analysis range (RANGE 1, 2 or 3) if the concentration levels of the sample/standard are known.
See System Range Data screen (see Section 2.2.3 System Range Data Screen for details) to view the
available system ranges and to select the correct operation range. If the concentration levels of the
samples/standards are not known, select AUTO so that BioTector can automatically select the optimum
analysis range. When RANGE is programmed as AUTO, a minimum of five analysis reactions is
recommended (the second setting) so that BioTector can find the optimum operation range with its
automatic exceedance tracking function. When AUTO option is selected, depending on analysis range
and system response, the first two or three analysis results may need to be discarded.
Page 26
2.2.5 Reaction Archive Screen
The Reaction Archive holds information on TIC, TOC, TC, VOC (in mgC/l), COD, BOD (in mgO/l), Drinking
Water parameters (REMOVAL in %, and RESULT in FAIL/PASS condition), stream valve, reaction range,
start time and related analysis information for the last 9999 reactions. If the archive is full, then every new
reaction overwrites the oldest one in the archive. As the Reaction Archive contains 9999 events, the user
must first enter the date at which the viewing of the archive starts. The Enter Date menu allows the user to
specify the date of the first displayed reaction from the archive.
Each reaction record in the reaction archive contains:
- Start Time
- reaction start time, which is displayed without seconds in this menu
- Date
- reaction date
- Reaction Type - with the prefixes below:
S1 to S3:
M1 to M3:
√
x
RS:
ZC:
ZK:
ZM:
SC:
SK:
SM:
A1 to A3:
Reactions from stream 1 to stream 3.
Reactions from manual sample stream 1 to manual stream 3.
Sample sensor detected the sample or there is no significant quantity of air
bubbles in the stream/manual grab sample lines.
Sample sensor detected no sample or there is significant quantity of air
bubbles in the stream/manual grab sample lines. See Sample Status in
section 8.3.8
Fault Setup for details.
Remote standby reaction.
Zero calibration reaction.
Zero check reaction.
Manually input zero adjust.
Span calibration reaction.
Span check reaction.
Manually input span adjust.
24 hours average result from stream 1 to stream 3.
The user can navigate through the displayed reactions individually by pressing the UP and DOWN keys each
time, or can navigate in steps of 10 reactions using the LEFT and RIGHT keys. Depending on system
analysis type (e.g. VOC, TC –TIC etc.) and system display options (e.g. COD and/or BOD) settings, BioTector
displays additional reaction data held on additional Reaction Archive screens. To access the screens, press
the ENTER key, and to return to the previous screen, press the ESCAPE key.
2.2.6 Fault Archive Menu
In the Fault Archive menu, the user can view the last 99 faults/warning/notification events logged in the
system, confirm if these events are current or not, and acknowledge the current events. If the archive is full,
then every new event overwrites the oldest one in the archive. The user can navigate through the displayed
reactions individually by pressing the UP and DOWN keys each time, or can navigate in steps of 10 reactions
using the LEFT and RIGHT keys. See Section 9
Troubleshooting of System Fault, Warning and
Notification Events for a list of all systems fault, warning and notification events.
The faults archive events are divided into three categories:
- Fault: Faults are categorized as events, which stop BioTector operation. The 4-20mA signals are set
to the fault level, and the fault relay is activated. The BioTector cannot be started unless the fault in
the archive has been acknowledged.
- Warning: Warning is a minor event, which does not require the BioTector to stop. The 4-20mA
signals are not changed, only the fault relay is activated.
- Notification: A notification is an information (e.g. “86_Power Up”, “87_Service Time Reset” etc.)
displayed on the screen.
To acknowledge any current events marked with an “*” in the archive, first identify and locate the
faults/warnings/notification. Follow the necessary troubleshooting procedures to solve the problem. See
Section 9
Troubleshooting of System Fault, Warning and Notification Events for details.
Acknowledge the fault by pressing the ENTER key in the Fault Archive menu. Please note that there are
system faults (e.g. 05_Pressure Test Fail), which cannot be acknowledged by the user. Such faults are reset
and acknowledged automatically by the system when system is started, when system is rebooted or when the
fault condition is solved. If an event cannot be acknowledged when the system is running, a “SYSTEM
RUNNING” message is displayed on screen.
Page 27
2.2.7 Time & Date Menu
This menu allows the system time and date to be set by the user. To change the system time or date (hours,
minutes, seconds, day, month and year), press the ENTER key, enter the new time and date and press the
ENTER key again.
In order to change the system date format, press the ENTER key, select new date format from the following
day, month and year options: DD-MM-YY, MM-DD-YY, YY-MM-DD and press the ENTER key again.
When the time is changed, it is possible for the BioTector to automatically start up if the
new time is after the startup time for a scheduled task, for example the startup time for
a manual sample sequence in Manual Program menu.
2.2.8 Contact Information
Contact Information menu displays the manufacturer/distributor contact details.
2.2.9 LCD Adjust
LCD Adjust menu allows the user to adjust the LCD screen’s contrast and backlight level. The default contrast
and backlight setting is 50%. The adjustment is carried out by entering to the relevant setting and making the
necessary change using the UP or DOWN arrow keys. When the UP/DOWN key is pressed and kept
pressed, BioTector displays the relevant adjustment in real time. When the adjustment is completed, press
the ENTER key to accept the new setting or press ESCAPE key to return back to the previous setting.
Page 28
2.3
Calibration Menu
Calibration menu allows the user to calibrate the analyzer. Zero and Span Calibration menus allow the user to
run the zero and span calibration cycles for a single range or for all system ranges available.
Calibration Menu Diagram
ENTER PASSWORD
CALIBRATION
ZERO CALIBRATION
SPAN CALIBRATION
2.3.1 Zero Calibration
Z E R O
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
C A L I B R A T I O N
Z E R O
R U N
R U N
R U N
Z E R O
Z E R O
- - >
A D J U S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1
2
3
R E A G E N T S
P U R G E
Z E R O
C A L I B R A T I O N
Z E R O
C H E C K
P R O G R A M
A V E R A G E
Z E R O
0 . 0
0 . 0
0 . 0
R 1
6
4
,
,
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
[ 0 . 0 ]
[ 0 . 0 ]
[ 0 . 0 ]
R 2
4
2
,
,
R 3
4
2
P R O G R A M
Zero Calibration menu allows the user to enter the suggested Zero Adjust values, to start the Reagent Purge
cycle, to start the Zero Calibration and Zero Check cycles and to program the number of zero reactions run at
each range.
1.-3. Zero Adjust. The Zero Adjust is used to compensate any organic contamination in the acid and base
reagents and any absorbed CO2 in the base reagent. The Zero Adjust values are generated automatically
by the system for each range when the zero calibration cycle is completed without any system warnings.
Zero Calibration cycle is activated by selecting the RUN ZERO CALIBRATION function in this menu.
When a Zero Check cycle is run using the RUN ZERO CHECK function, the system only checks the zero
response at each range and displays the suggested Zero Adjust values in brackets “[ ]” for all ranges next
to the current Zero Adjust settings. When a Zero Check cycle is completed, if necessary the suggested
Zero Adjust values can be programmed manually by entering the corresponding suggested Zero Offset
values for each range (1, 2 and 3) in this menu. When the Zero Adjust settings are entered manually,
system logs this information in the reaction archive with the prefix “ZM” (Zero Manual).
4. Run Reagents Purge. The RUN REAGENTS PURGE function is used to prime all reagents in the
BioTector. If necessary, the pump operation time for Reagent Purge cycle can be increased in the
Reagents Purge menu.
5. Run Zero Calibration. Each time BioTector reagents are replaced or topped up and each time a service
is carried out, it is strongly recommended to use the RUN ZERO CALIBRATION function so that the
system can set the zero offset values automatically. The zero calibration reactions operate in the same
manner as a normal reaction. Depending on system settings, BioTector either takes DI Water as a
sample or does not take any sample during the Zero Calibration cycle. See ZERO WATER in section
8.3.4.2
Zero Program for details. To start the zero calibration, press the ENTER key at this menu
item. An “*” will indicate that the function is running. At the end of the Zero Calibration cycle, the following
settings are checked and updated:
Page 29
1. The Zero Adjust settings for each range are updated automatically by the system using the uncalibrated TOC measurement (not the results seen on the LCD screen). If a Zero Check is used
to check the zero offset, the suggested values are shown in brackets “[ ]” next to the actual Zero
Adjust settings.
2. If the CO2 LEVEL is set as AUTO for automatic updating in the Reaction Check menu, then the
reaction check CO2 Level is also updated automatically.
3. The CO2 Level is also checked against the BASE CO2 ALARM setting in Fault Setup menu. If the
measured CO2 Level is greater that the BASE CO2 ALARM value, system generates a “52_HIGH
CO2 IN BASE” warning.
6. Run Zero Check. Zero Check cycle is similar to the Zero Calibration above, but BioTector does not
update any of the Zero Adjust or CO2 Level settings. System only checks the BASE CO2 ALARM
described above.
8. Zero Program. Zero Program function allows the user to program the number of zero reactions run at
one or more ranges (R1, R2 and/or R3). When the number of zero calibration reactions for one or two of
the ranges is set to zero, system runs the zero cycle on the programmed range or ranges and calculates
the Zero Adjust values for the other ranges automatically. It is recommended not to modify the factory set
Zero Program values unless it is absolutely necessary. Any unnecessary modification in this setting may
have an impact on the zero offset values.
9. Zero Average. Zero Average function allows the user to program the number of zero reactions to be
averaged for each range (R1, R2 and/or R3) at the end of the zero cycles. It is recommended not to
modify the factory set Zero Average values unless it is absolutely necessary. Any unnecessary
modification in this setting may have an impact on the zero offset values.
11. Zero Program. Zero Program is a link to Maintenance, System Configuration, Sequence Program,
Zero Program menu. See Section 8.3.4.2
Zero Program.
Page 30
2.3.2 Span Calibration
S P A N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
C A L I B R A T I O N
T O C
S P A N
T I C
S P A N
R U N
R U N
S P A N
S P A N
S
S
R
T
T
T
T
P
P
A
O
O
I
I
A N
P R O
A N
A V E
N G E
C
C A L
C
C H E C
C
C A L
C
C H E C
- - >
S P A N
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
A D J U S T
1
2
3
A D J U S T
1
2
3
C A L I B R A T I O N
C H E C K
G R A M
R A G E
S T D
K
S T D
S T D
K
S T D
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
4
1
1 0
5
1 2
6
0
0
5
0
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
m
m
m
m
g
g
g
g
C
C
C
C
/
/
/
/
l
l
l
l
P R O G R A M
Span Calibration menu allows the user to enter the Span Adjust values manually, to start the Span Calibration
and Span Check cycles and to program the number of span reactions, span operation range and the
concentrations of the standard solutions used. Above menu displays the parameters for the TIC & TOC
systems. In TC and VOC systems, the relevant parameters, identified below, are displayed in this menu.
1.-3. TOC Span Adjust. This menu item allows the user to set the TOC span adjust factors manually by
entering the STANDARD solution used and the calibrated average reaction RESULT at each range (1, 2
and 3). When the STANDARD and RESULT values are entered, system automatically calculates the
corresponding span factors of each parameter for each range. In TC and VOC systems, this function is
named as TC Span Adjust. In order to manually set the Span Adjust factors:
First enter the concentration of the standard solution used.
S P A N
1 <
2
3
4
A D J U S T
T O C
S P A N
A D J U S T
T I C
S P A N
A D J U S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
S T A N D A R D
1 0 0 . 0
2
1 . 0 0
3
1 . 0 0
1
1 . 0 0
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
R E S U L T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
S T A N D A R D
1 0 0 . 0
2
1 . 0 0
3
1 . 0 0
1
1 . 0 0
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
R E S U L T
9 9 . 5
Next enter the average result.
S P A N
1 <
2
3
4
A D J U S T
T O C
S P A N
A D J U S T
T I C
S P A N
A D J U S T
When the ENTER key is pressed again, the new span factor is automatically calculated. In order to set the
span adjust factors to 1.00, enter 0.0 values for both standard and result.
Page 31
4.-6. TIC Span Adjust. This menu item allows the user to set the TIC span adjust factors manually for each
range as described for TOC Span Adjust above.
10. Run Span Calibration. This function starts the Span Calibration cycle. The span calibration reactions are
run at a single range programmed by the RANGE in this menu below. At the end of the span calibration
cycle, BioTector automatically calculates the Span Adjust factors and displays it for Span Adjusts above.
Unless it is manually modified, the same Span Adjust factor calculated for the programmed RANGE in
this menu is used for the other two ranges as well. The span reactions operates in the same manner as a
normal reaction, but the Sample Pump reverse operation is disabled to prevent the contamination of the
standard solution connected to calibration/manual port. Span Calibration reactions have the prefix of
“SC”.
11. Run Span Check. This function starts the Span Check cycle. The operation is similar to the Span
Calibration cycle above, but BioTector does not update any Span Adjust values at the end of the span
check cycle. Span Check reactions have the prefix “SK”.
13. Span Program. Span Program function allows the user to program the number of span reactions to be
carried out during the Span Calibration and Span Check cycles. It is recommended not to modify the
factory set Span Program value unless it is absolutely necessary. Any unnecessary modification in this
setting may have an impact on the span adjust values.
14. Span Average. Span Average function allows the user to program the number of reactions to be
averaged at the end of the Span Calibration and Span Check cycles. It is recommended not to modify the
factory set Span Program value unless it is absolutely necessary. Any unnecessary modification in this
setting may have an impact on the span adjust values.
15. Range. Range function allows the user to program the operation range at which the Span Calibration and
Span Check reactions are carried out. If the selected range is in conflict with the programmed
CALIBRATION STANDARD concentration in this menu, system automatically displays a “Caution!
Reaction range or Standard is Incorrect” warning. See System Range Data screen (see Section 2.2.3
System Range Data Screen for details) in order to select the correct operation range or correct
standard solution.
16. TOC Cal Std. TOC Calibration Standard function allows the user to program the concentration (mgC/l) of
the TOC standard solution used in Span Calibration reactions. If the programmed concentration level is in
conflict with the programmed RANGE above, system automatically displays a “Caution! Reaction Range
or Standard is Incorrect” warning. See System Range Data screen in order to select the correct operation
range or correct standard solution. If TOC Calibration Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l, system does
not calculate or update any Span Adjust factors and therefore omits any span related warnings defined
above. See Section 6.2
Calibration Standards for the details of BioTector standard solutions and
preparation procedures. In TC systems, this parameter is named as TC Calibration Standard.
17. TOC Check Std. TOC Check Standard function allows the user to program the concentration (mgC/l) of
the TOC standard solution used in Span Check reactions. If TOC Check Standard is programmed as
0.0mgC/l, any span related warnings are omitted. In TC systems, this parameter is named as TC Check
Standard.
18. TIC Cal Std. TIC Calibration Standard function allows the user to program the concentration (mgC/l) of
the TIC standard solution used in Span Calibration reactions. If TIC Calibration Standard is programmed
as 0.0mgC/l, any span related warnings are omitted. In VOC and TC – TIC systems, it is recommended to
run the TIC and TOC calibrations separately using separate standard solutions.
19. TIC Check Std. TIC Check Standard function allows the user to program the concentration (mgC/l) of the
TIC standard solution used in Span Check reactions. If TIC Check Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l,
any span related warnings are omitted.
Page 32
20. TC Cal Std. In VOC systems, the sum of the TIC and TOC Calibration Standard solution is displayed as
TC Calibration Standard. When TOC Calibration Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l, and when a
concentration of TIC Calibration Standard is programmed above, BioTector displays the TC Calibration
Standard as 0.0mgC/l on purpose. This allows the calibration of TIC without any effect on the TC
calibration. See definitions for TOC Calibration Standard above, Section 8.3.4.3
Span Program and
Section 6.2 Calibration Standards for further details.
21. TC Check Std. In VOC systems, the sum of the TIC and TOC Check Standard solution is displayed as
TC Check Standard. When TOC Check Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l, and when a concentration
of TIC Check Standard is programmed above, BioTector displays the TC Check Standard as 0.0mgC/l on
purpose. This allows the check of TIC without any effect on the TC check.
23. Span Program. Span Program is a link to Maintenance, System Configuration, Sequence Program,
Span Program menu (see Section 8.3.4.3 Span Program ).
Page 33
Section 3
Technical Specifications
TYPICAL TECHNICAL DATA
Enclosure:
Dimensions (HxWxD):
Weight:
Power Consumption:
Mains Connection:
Mains Wire Specification:
Signal Wire Specification:
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
750mm x 500mm x 320mm
Enclosure height may increase to 1000mm, depending on system optional
features.
Typically 46 kg
100 W (VA)
115V AC, 60Hz or 230V AC, 50Hz (10%)
Other power options are available on request.
Number of Cores = 3, Current Rating minimum = 10 Amps, CSA (Cross
Sectional Area minimum) = 1.50mm 2
Number of Cores = 6 (+2 cores per additional signal), Current Rating
minimum = 1 Amp, CSA (Cross Sectional Area minimum) = 0.22mm 2
FEATURES IN DETAIL
Display:
Data Storage:
SD/MMC Card:
Operation:
Language Options:
High Contrast 40 Character x 16 Line Backlit LCD with LED Backlight
Previous 9999 analysis data on screen in the microcontroller memory and
storage of data archive for the lifetime of the analyzer in the SD/MMC card
Previous 99 fault data on screen in the microcontroller memory and storage
of fault data archive for the lifetime of the analyzer in the SD/MMC card
Flash memory card for data transfer and for software & configuration updates
Microcontroller with BioTector OS3 Software and Membrane Keyboard
English, French, German
Other language options are available on request.
INPUT & OUTPUT SIGNALS
Standard Output:
Digital Output:
Data Transfer Port:
4 programmable 4-20mA analog output signal channel fitted as standard
Maximum impedance: 500 ohms
6 freely programmable system relays (volt free changeover contact with a
current rating of 1Amp at 30V DC)
One of the relays is preprogrammed as system fault relay as standard.
SD/MMC Card
OPTIONAL FEATURES
Result Output:
Remote Control:
Industrial Interface:
Calibration:
Multi-stream:
Manual stream:
4-20mA Outputs:
Hazardous Area:
TIC, TC, VOC, after correlation COD, BOD
Input for remote start / standby
Input for remote stream and range selection (up to 2 online streams)
Input for remote manual grab sample analysis
Network Control Unit for remote access over Internet or Intranet connection
using HTTP over TCP/IP protocol
Modbus, Profibus, Ethernet
(when any of the Modbus, Profibus or Ethernet option is selected, the digital
output signals are sent through the relevant device with its specific
communication protocol)
Automatic Calibration is available.
Calibration is not necessary between every 6 month service intervals.
Up to 2 sample input channels, which can be used for online streams
Manual grab sample channel, which can be used for automatic calibration.
Sample input channels may be configured as manual grab sample channels.
As individual signal up to maximum of 4 or as multiplex signal up to maximum
of 35. Maximum impedance: 500 ohms.
Certification options are available to European Standards (ATEX for Zone 2)
and to North American Standards (Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2).
Other options are available on request.
Page 34
CONSUMABLES
Typical Replacement Frequency & Consumption
Acid & Base:
Instrument Air:
26-33 weeks/19 Liters (based on standard range and 6 minute analysis cycle)
1.5 bar, - 20°C dew point (free of water, oil and dust)
Average consumption is less than 5.4 m3/hour.
Filter pack is recommended and available to meet the air quality specification.
BioTector Air Compressor is available for air supply.
Service:
6 Monthly Intervals
ANALYSIS PARAMETERS
Oxidation Method:
TOC Measurement:
Patented Two-Stage Advanced Oxidation Process using Hydroxyl Radicals
NDIR measurement of CO2 after oxidation
Measurement Terms:
TOC (Total Organic Carbon) including Non-Purgeable Organic Carbon
(NPOC) and Purgeable Organic Carbon (POC)
BioTector TIC&TOC mode measures NPOC.
BioTector VOC mode measures TOC as NPOC+POC.
Measured Components:
TOC (NPOC)
TOC (NPOC + POC)
TIC
TC
VOC (POC)
COD*
BOD*
* COD & BOD by correlation algorithm incorporating TOC measured results
Cycle Time:
from 5.5 minutes, depending on range and application
MONITORING RANGES:
Standard Range
Accuracy and Repeatability
Detection Limit
TOC
0-25mgC/l
3% of reading or 0.03mgC/l, whichever is greater
0.06mg/l
Second Range (Optional for Exceedance Tracking)
0-100mgC/l (5% of reading or 0.5mgC/l, whichever is greater)
Range Selection:
Automatic or Manual (up to 2 ranges configurable)
Page 35
SAMPLE & ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Sample Volume:
Sample Inlet Pressure:
Drain Pressure:
Sample Inlet Temperature:
Sample Flow Rate:
Sample Particle Size:
Ambient Temperature:
Humidity:
Ingress Protection:
System Sound:
Up to 12.0ml
Ambient (for applications with high sample pressure, sampling systems are
available)
Ambient (for applications with high drain pressure, optional systems are
available)
2°C – 60°C
(36°F - 140°F)
Minimum 100ml per sample
Up to 100 microns
5°C – 45°C
(41°F - 113°F)
Cooling and heating options are available.
5% - 85%, non-condensing
IP44, standard fan cooled, maximum ambient temperature 45°C (113°F)
IP54, air cooled, maximum ambient temperature 35°C (95°F)
IP54, vortex cooled, maximum ambient temperature 50°C (122°F)
< 60 dBa
The manufacturer has a continuous research and development program. Specifications may
therefore be changed without notice. For specification updates, please contact the
manufacturer.
Page 36
Section 4
4.1
Introduction
BioTector Major Components
4.1.1 Analysis Enclosure
Figure 1, figure 2 and table 2 below shows the typical major analysis enclosure components of BioTector
TOC Analyzer.
Figure 1 BioTector analysis enclosure major components (typical TIC & TOC system)
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
9
14
15
10
11
12
13
16
17
Page 37
Figure 2 BioTector oxygen concentrator enclosure major components
18
20
19
21
22
25
24
26
23
27
29
28
13
12
30
31
16
32
33
34
35
Page 38
Table 2 BioTector major components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Power and Input/Output Board
NDIR CO2 Analyzer
Ferrite
Acid Pump, P3
Base Pump, P4
Ozone Line Filter
Main Power Switch
Cooler
Ozone Generator
Sample Pump, P1
Sample Sensor
Reactor Valve, MV3
Manual Grab Sample/Calibration Valve, MV5 or Multi-stream Valve, MV6
Mixer Reactor
Ozone Destructor
Sample Valve, MV4
Exhaust Valve, MV1
Fan
Oxygen (O2) Tank
Termination Board
Molecular Sieve Bed
22
Oxygen Pressure Regulator
23
Hepa Filter
24
Cooler Fan
25
Sample Pump Motor
26
Oxygen (O2) Controller Board
27
Mass Flow Controller (MFC)
28
Filter Board
29
Rotary Valve, OV2
30
Air Isolation Valve, OV1
31
Pressure Relief Valve
32
Reactor Motor, P2
33
Exhaust Filter
34
Mixer Reactor Liquid Leak Detector
35
Inner and Outer Enclosure Liquid Leak Detector
Page 39
4.1.2 Motherboard Enclosure
Figure 3 and table 3 below shows the BioTector motherboard enclosure components.
Figure 3 BioTector motherboard enclosure components
1
2
3
4
Page 40
Table 3 BioTector motherboard components
1
2
3
4
Motherboard
Battery (Varta, CR2430, Lithium, 3V, 285mAh)
ATEX / IECEx Zone 1 analyzers – Ex-i battery
Processor Board
MMC/SD Flash Memory Card Slot and Memory Card
Page 41
4.2
BioTector Operation
Detailed information on the system operation is available, in presentation and video formats, in the MMC/SD
card shipped with the BioTector. It is recommended to review these files to understand the system operation.
The BioTector is designed to provide continuous online single-component (e.g. TOC) or multi-component
(e.g. TOC & TN & TP) monitoring. The BioTector can operate with unfiltered samples including soft
particulates up to 100 µm in diameter, and will give accurate measurements even when fats, high levels of
salts and/or calcium is present in the sample.
In BioTector multi-component analyzers, the system can be configured as a;
1) TIC & TOC system to measure the Total Inorganic Carbon (TIC) and Total Organic Carbon (TOC)
content of a sample. The TOC result obtained from a TIC & TOC system represents the NonPurgeable Organic Carbon (NPOC). The TIC & TOC system is the standard system for samples
which does not contain any volatile organic material or for samples which contains insignificant
concentration of volatile organic material.
2) TC system to measure the Total Carbon (TC) content of a sample. The TC result obtained from a TC
system represents the sum of TIC, NPOC and Purgeable Organic Carbon (POC) content.
3) VOC system to measure the TIC, TOC, TC and Volatile Organic Carbon (VOC) contents of a sample
by means of two analysis reactions in single reactor configuration. VOC result represents the
Purgeable Organic Carbon (POC). The TOC result in a VOC system is calculated from the TC and
TIC measurements as TC – TIC. Therefore the TOC result includes the VOC (POC) content of the
sample. In other words, the TOC result represents the sum of NPOC and POC content.
TC, VOC and TC-TIC configurations are system optional features.
As a brief introduction, the operation of BioTector analyzers can be summarized as follows:
i. A sample liquid is brought to the analyzer by means of a peristaltic pump. The sample is injected into
the BioTector reactor chamber.
ii. A patented Two Stage Advanced Oxidation process (TSAO) oxidizes the organic material in the
sample.
iii. The carbon dioxide formed in the oxidation process is sparged and measured by a Non-dispersive
Infrared (NDIR) analyzer.
iv. The results are displayed as TIC, TOC, TC and VOC depending on system configuration.
v. The oxidized liquid is discharged and collected in a sample catch-pot and again depending on system
configuration, the Total Nitrogen and/or Total Phosphorus analysis is carried out applying direct
photometric and/or colorimetric methods.
vi. The sample tubes are purged by running the BioTector peristaltic sample pump in reverse direction.
4.2.1 BioTector Oxidation Method
A patented Two Stage Advanced Oxidation process (TSAO), which uses hydroxyl radicals as the oxidizing
agent, is used for the oxidation of the sample.
The hydroxyl radical oxidation is a powerful oxidation technology, which keeps the wetted reactor parts clean
in all types of applications. BioTector self-cleaning technology using hydroxyl radical oxidation ensures that
the cleaning of the reactor is not necessary.
Page 42
4.2.2 BioTector Sample Injection
The BioTector analyzes a precise volume of liquid. The Sample Pump injects a pre-programmed number of
pulses (half revolutions of pump) of liquid into the reactor for each measurement and therefore the volume of
liquid included in each pulse is consistent.
Sample is initially drawn from the source by a peristaltic Sample Pump.
In standard TIC & TOC systems, Acid Pump activates and the first TIC acid is injected into the Mixer Reactor.
Sample Valve and Reactor Valve activates, Sample Pump rotates forward and injects the sample directly into
the Mixer Reactor with the relevant number of pulses appropriate to the range.
In TC systems, the sample injection is carried out similar to the one described for TIC & TOC systems above
but unlike TIC acid, first the base reagent (e.g. Sodium Hydroxide) is injected into Mixer Reactor. Sample
Valve and Reactor Valve activates, Sample Pump rotates forward and injects the sample directly into the
Mixer Reactor with the relevant number of pulses appropriate to the range.
In VOC systems, BioTector carries out two separate sample injections for the two analysis reactions run
consecutively in a single reactor configuration. The first analysis reaction is a TC reaction and the second one
is a TIC & TOC reaction. The sample injection takes place as described for the TC systems and for the TIC &
TOC systems above. Figure 4 shows the typical analysis layout of TIC & TOC system below.
Detailed information on sample injection is available, in presentation and video formats, in the MMC/SD card
shipped with the BioTector. It is recommended to review these files to understand BioTector sample injection.
Page 43
Figure 4 BioTector analysis layout (typical TIC & TOC system)
Page 44
4.2.3 BioTector Oxygen Concentrator
The operation of BioTector oxygen concentrator is based on the crystalline zeolite molecular sieves, which
permits the separation of oxygen gas from the mixture of gases that comprise air. As air flows through a
column or bed of molecular sieve, the component gases it contains are adsorbed and stratified in the order of
their relative affinity to the molecular sieve material. The process may continue until the next to last gas
component stratifies near the end of the bed. Once the full bed length is used, the bed must be regenerated
by desorbing (or purging) the adsorbed gases. Purging is accomplished by reducing the pressure in the bed
and back-flushing with some of the concentrated gas product. Adsorption and desorption are completely
reversible processes and are carried out indefinitely.
The theory behind the operation of the oxygen concentrator is Pressure Swing Adsorption (PSA). This is
based on flowing air through the column (the sieve bed) packed with molecular sieve material. The
components of the air (Water Vapor, Carbon Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Hydrocarbons, Nitrogen, Oxygen
and Argon) are adsorbed in order of their relative affinity to the molecular sieve material. Figure 5 shows the
adsorption of air components inside the molecular sieves.
Figure 5 Adsorption of air components in oxygen concentrator molecular sieves.
Once the sieve bed is used, then it is re-generated by purging the adsorbed gasses from the molecular sieve.
This is achieved by removing the air supply from the inlet to the sieve bed, and back-flushing the sieve bed
with some of the concentrated gas product. The typical oxygen purity obtained from a PSA oxygen
concentrator is 93% (±3%) with balance gas Argon.
Figure 6 below shows the layout of BioTector oxygen concentrator and the operation of the Rotary Valve used
for the PSA process.
Page 45
Figure 6 BioTector oxygen concentrator layout
Page 46
4.2.4 BioTector Analysis Types
BioTector TOC analyzer has four factory calibrated analysis types:
1. TIC & TOC (NPOC) Analysis: Total Inorganic Carbon & Total Organic Carbon (Non-Purgeable
Organic Carbon) Analysis
2. TC Analysis:
Total Carbon Analysis
3. VOC (POC) Analysis:
Volatile (Purgeable) Organic Carbon Analysis
4.2.4.1
TIC & TOC Analysis
1. An acid reagent (e.g. Sulfuric Acid) is added and the oxygen carrier gas flow is activated to remove
the inorganic carbon.
2. An unfiltered sample is injected into the BioTector reaction chamber (Mixer Reactor).
3. The carbon dioxide gas is sparged by the addition of the acid reagent and is carried by the oxygen
carrier gas and measured with a nondispersive infrared (NDIR) CO2 analyzer. The result is displayed
as Total Inorganic Carbon (TIC). This reaction phase is called TIC phase.
4. Ozone generator is activated. A base reagent (e.g. Sodium Hydroxide) is injected and the sample is
then oxidized with hydroxyl radicals, a strong oxidizing agent, which is generated by exposing high
pH reagents to ozone. This reaction phase is called Base Oxidation phase. The complete oxidation of
organic compounds takes place and carbonates are formed.
5. After the Base Oxidation phase, the carbonates are sparged in the form of carbon dioxide gas by the
addition of an acid reagent. The carbon dioxide gas is carried by the oxygen carrier gas and
measured with the NDIR CO2 analyzer. The result is displayed as Total Organic Carbon (TOC). This
reaction phase is called TOC phase. The TOC result obtained from the TIC & TOC analysis type
represents the Non-Purgeable Organic Carbon (NPOC).
6. At the end of the reaction, the oxidized sample liquid is discharged from the reactor with increased
oxygen flow.
4.2.4.2
TC Analysis
1. The oxygen carrier gas flow and the ozone generator are activated. Base reagent is injected into the
reactor and hydroxyl radicals are generated by exposing the base reagent to ozone. This reaction
phase is called Pre-Oxidation.
2. An unfiltered sample is injected into the reactor of the BioTector with a low flow of oxygen carrier gas.
3. The volatile organic content of the sample is oxidized with hydroxyl radicals. This reaction phase is
called VOC Oxidation, as the oxidation of the volatile organic matter is achieved without being
sparged.
4. When the VOC Oxidation phase is complete, the oxygen gas flow and the ozone generator is
activated and the remaining Non-Purgeable Organic Carbon (NPOC) content in the sample is
oxidized by the hydroxyl radicals in Base Oxidation phase. The complete oxidation of organic and
inorganic compounds takes place and carbonates are formed.
5. When the oxidation processes are completed, the carbonates are sparged in the form of carbon
dioxide gas by the addition of an acid reagent. The carbon dioxide gas is carried by the oxygen
carrier gas and measured with the NDIR CO2 analyzer. The result is displayed as Total Carbon (TC).
The TC result obtained from the TC analysis type represents the sum of TIC, NPOC and Purgeable
Organic Carbon (POC):
TC = TIC + NPOC + POC
6. At the end of the reaction, the oxidized sample liquid is discharged from the reactor with increased
oxygen flow.
BioTector analysis types are optional features. If the BioTector is built as a TIC & TOC
system only, modifications in the system configuration will be required for TC analysis to
be possible.
Page 47
4.2.4.3
VOC (POC) Analysis
BioTector Volatile Organic Carbon (VOC) analysis type is a combination of TC analysis followed by a TIC &
TOC (NPOC) analysis. The VOC result obtained from the VOC analysis type represents the Purgeable
Organic Carbon (POC) content of the sample. When both TC and TIC & TOC analysis are complete, the
flowing data is available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
TC result, as measured and displayed from the TC analysis.
TIC result, as measured and displayed from the TIC & TOC analysis. TOC result obtained from the
TIC & TOC analysis represents the NPOC.
TOC result including the VOC, which is calculated from the difference between the TC and TIC:
TOCv = TC – TIC
The TOC result displayed in VOC analysis type includes the purgeable organic carbon (POC) present
in the sample. In other words the TOC result, obtained in VOC analysis type, is the sum of NPOC and
POC:
TOCv = NPOC + POC
VOC (POC) result, which is calculated from the difference between the measured TC (from the TC
analysis), and the sum of measured TIC and measured NPOC (from the TIC & TOC analysis):
VOC (POC) = TC – (TIC + NPOC)
The NPOC result, as measured from the TIC & TOC analysis, is not displayed, it is only used to
calculate the VOC (POC) element in the sample. All displayed results can be programmed in the
system and sent as 4-20mA output signals to an external device.
In VOC analysis mode, it is possible to program BioTector to carry out scheduled TIC (TIC s) analysis
and measure TOC, which includes NPOC and POC, for samples which may contain volatile organic
carbon and the TIC concentration of the sample remains constant or changes slowly. With this
measurement, the TIC value is measured on a scheduled basis depending on the TC CHECK
concentration level programmed in Stream Program menu (see section 8.2.3
Stream Program for
details). In VOC analysis mode with TICs, TOC result including the volatiles is calculated from the
difference between the TC and TICs:
TOCv = TC – TICs
Scheduled TIC (TICs) measurement is unique to BioTector and is developed for applications such as
condensate return monitoring in the petrochemical sector where rapid response is required in the
event of a breakthrough of a volatile material. The traditional approach is to measure TC only,
however this can result in inaccurate process decisions as TIC can often be present in the samples.
In other words, any high TC response due to an increase in TIC levels may create unnecessary
alarms. Additionally, the TIC result is a valuable measurement in its own right as it may highlight other
specific or undesirable conditions within the sample such as the condensate return.
BioTector analysis types are optional features. If the BioTector is built as a TIC &
TOC system only, modifications in the system configuration will be required for VOC
analysis to be possible.
BioTectors built with the VOC analysis option can be programmed on site to operate
with the TIC & TOC only or TC only analysis types.
Page 48
Section 5
5.1
Installation
Basic System Requirements
Power and Signal Requirements
•
•
Mains Connection:
Mains Wire Specification:
•
Signal Wire Specification:
•
•
Power Consumption:
Electrical Connections:
115V AC, 60Hz or 230V AC, 50Hz (10%)
Number of Cores = 3
Current Rating minimum = 10 Amps
CSA (Cross Sectional Area minimum) = 1.50mm2
Number of Cores = 6 (+2 cores per additional signal)
Current Rating minimum = 1 Amp
CSA (Cross Sectional Area minimum) = 0.22mm2
Maximum 100 W (VA)
Typically 4 cable glands, PG13.5, clamping range 6 - 12 mm
Air Supply and Reagent Requirements
Instrument Air Requirements
•
Air Quality:
- 20°C dew point (free of water, oil and dust)
To meet or exceed the air quality specification, filter pack may be
required.
•
Air Supply Pressure:
1.5 bar
•
Air Supply Flow Rate:
Minimum 8.4 m3/hour at 1.5 bar
•
Air Consumption:
Average consumption is less than 5.4 m3/hour, typically 3.6 m3/hour
Typical Reagent Requirements
•
•
Acid Reagent: 6.0 N Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4), containing 350 mg/l Manganese Sulphate Monohydrate.
Base Reagent: 4.0 N Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH).
Sample, Drain and Exhaust Requirements
•
•
•
•
•
Sample Inlet & Outlet Pressure:
Sample Inlet Temperature:
Sample Flow Rate:
Sample Particle Size:
Drain & Exhaust:
Ambient
2°C – 60°C (36°F - 140°F)
Minimum 100ml per sample
Up to 100 microns
Ambient
Page 49
5.2
Unpacking and Installation
The BioTector analyzer weighs typically 46kg (101 lb). Therefore, appropriate
means should be used for transporting, un-packing, lifting and installing the
BioTector.
Caution
The BioTector analyzer is shipped ready to be installed, with a kit of parts including sample tubes, reagent
tubes and a selection of spare parts, spare fuses and ferrules.
When the BioTector shipping container is opened, it must be inspected against the shipping list located inside
the container. Additionally, it should be confirmed that no damage was caused to the BioTector during
shipment.
Any issues must be reported to the manufacturer within 3 days.
The BioTector is shipped with a Commissioning and Startup checklist (see Section 7
Analyzer
Commissioning and Startup for details). In order to ensure a quick and trouble free installation, this list should
be followed in the correct sequence.
Points to note regarding installation:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The BioTector should be located as close to the sample point as possible.
Unless it is specified, the BioTector has an Ingress Protection rating of IP54. It is recommended that
the BioTector is installed in a dry, well ventilated and dust free area.
The BioTector should be installed where the ambient temperature is between 5 and 45°C. If the
ambient temperature exceeds 45°C, a vortex cooler can be installed to reduce the internal
temperature of the BioTector.
The BioTector should be installed vertically, with the maximum variation on each axis less than 2°.
Ensure that there is enough clearance at the front of the BioTector to allow the door to be opened.
Ensure that there is enough clearance at the left hand side of the BioTector for the tube and electrical
connections. There should be enough clearance at both sides for the cooling fan to operate
unimpeded.
If there are corrosive gasses in the area, then the BioTector fan should be blanked off,
and an instrument air purge system should be fitted.
Caution
Page 50
5.2.1 Analyzer Dimensions and Mounting
The BioTector TOC analyzer enclosure is a Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) cabinet. This enclosure
facilitates easy access to all components and thus eases the service and maintenance procedures. Figure 7
and table 4 below gives the dimensions of various BioTector enclosures.
Figure 7 BioTector Dimensions
Table 4 BioTector Dimensions
BioTector TOC Analyzer
BioTector TOC Analyzer
with extended enclosure
Dimension A
750mm
Dimension B
480mm
Width
500mm
Depth
320mm
1000mm
660mm
500mm
320mm
Page 51
Figure 8 below illustrates the BioTector door clearance dimensions.
Figure 8 BioTector Door Clearance Dimensions
•
•
•
•
It is recommended that a clear space of at least 300mm is allowed around the analyzer from the right
and the left sides and from the top and the bottom. The recommended clear space in the front of the
analyzer is 1500mm for easy access to the system.
When BioTector is being mounted on a wall or a stand, the support has to be strong enough to carry
typically four times of the weight of BioTector (~180 kg).
The BioTector should be lifted applying a safe method in accordance with local regulations.
The minimum size of the bolts used to hold the BioTector in place should be M8.
Page 52
5.2.2 Wiring Power and Signal Terminals
BioTector contains electrical components operating under high voltages. Contact
may result in electric shock and severe or fatal injury.
DANGER
The equipment is for permanent connection to the mains only. (Plug and socket
should not be used.)
Caution
Figure 9 below show the typical mains (for both 230 and 115 Volts systems) and the 4-20mA signal
connections in BioTector. The connection to mains power {230V or 115V AC (10%), 50/60 Hz} should be
carried out by a certified electrician, in accordance with site regulations. The mains wire specifications are 3
cores, 10 Amps minimum current rating and 1.50mm2 minimum CSA (Cross Sectional Area). The mains cable
should be screened and screen earthed to comply with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/108/EC).
For 4-20mA and any other signal connections, only screened instrument cable, which comply with the EEC
directive, should be used. The signal cable should also be screened, and the screen earthed. The
specifications for the signal wire are 6 cores (+2 cores per additional signal), 1 Amp minimum current rating,
0.22mm2 minimum CSA (Cross Sectional Area).
Page 53
Figure 9 Mains and 4-20mA terminal diagram for 115 / 230 V systems
All electrical, sample, reagent, drain and exhaust connections should be carried out
in accordance with the technical specifications and drawings given in this manual.
Errors as a result of non-conformity to these specifications will not be covered by the
warranty.
The wiring and earth connections to the analyzer should be carried out in accordance with local regulations,
and securely terminated in the phase, neutral and earth terminals in the BioTector. Cable glands must be
used to secure the cables when necessary.
Page 54
5.2.3 Wiring External Power Disconnection Switches
The mains power must be connected through one or more external 2-pole disconnection switches, so that the
power to the BioTector and/or to the optional air compressor can be isolated without opening the electronics
enclosure.
• The external power disconnection switches must be located in easily accessible locations, with a
maximum distance of 2 meters from the BioTector and/or the air compressor.
• The switches must be clearly marked for their purpose.
• The switch must comply with local electrical regulations, and have a breaking capacity of 10 Amps or
greater.
• The MCB or fuse (circuit breaker) located on the customers fuse board should be rated at 10 Amps or
greater.
Figure 10 below illustrates the positioning and the installation of the disconnection switch.
Figure 10 External Power Disconnection Switch
Page 55
When the wiring of the system is completed, the power up of the system should be carried out in the order
below:
i)
While the external disconnection switches are powered off, power on the internal Main
Power Switch in the BioTector.
ii)
Close the BioTector electronics enclosure.
iii)
If installed, close the air compressor enclosure.
iv)
Switch on the external disconnection switches.
The power off of the BioTector should be carried out by switching off with the external disconnection switch
followed by the internal Main Power Switch. If installed, the power off of the air compressor should be carried
out by switching off with the external disconnection switch followed by compressor power switch.
Page 56
5.2.4 System Fuse Specifications
Table 5 below summarizes the location and specification of the fuses used in BioTector. The fuse values
tabulated below can be changed depending on system selected options. The locations of the fuses are also
displayed in figure 9 above.
BioTector contains electrical components operating under high voltages.
Contact may result in electric shock and severe or fatal injury.
All electrical work should be carried out by qualified electrical personnel only.
DANGER
When any fuse replacement is required in the system, please refer to table 5
below and system specific drawings.
Table 5 System Fuse Specifications
Location
Board
Number
Interru
pt
Rating
Type
Power and
Input/Output
Board
81204350-01
H-250V
Miniature
5x20mm
Motherboard
81204340_02
L-250V
Miniature
5x20mm
BioTector
Compressor
Start Signal
Cable
N/A
L-250V
Miniature
5x20mm
Material
Ceramic
Glass
Glass
Fuse
Number
230 V
Systems
Current
Rating
115 V
Systems
Current
Rating
F1
F1 *1
F2
F3, F4
F3, F4 *2
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
T 2.00A
T 3.15A
T 1.00A
T 500mA
T 1.00A
F 1.60A
F 2.00A
F 2.50A
F 3.15A
F 2.50A
T 3.15A
T 5.00A
T 1.00A
T 500mA
T 1.00A
F 1.60A
F 2.00A
F 2.50A
F 3.15A
F 2.50A
N/A
T 200mA
T 200mA
KEY
A:
DIN:
F1-6:
F:
H:
ID:
L:
mA:
N/A:
PCB:
T:
V:
*1:
*2:
Amperes
German Institute for Standardization (Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.)
Fuse Number
Fast Acting (Fast Blow)
High Interrupt
Identification
Low Interrupt
Milli-amperes
Not Applicable
Printed Circuit Board
Time Lag (Time Delay)
Volts
(Optional) used with TDK power supply, type SWS300-24 only.
(Optional) if higher powered device are connected, for example Multi-channel Modbus / Profibus,
External Valve, External Relay.
Page 57
5.3
Air Supply and Reagent Connections
The orientation of the ferrules inside each fitting of BioTector is critical for the correct operation of the system.
Incorrect ferrule orientation may create gas/liquid leak and/or introduce air bubbles into the system lines.
Therefore, the ferrules on all carrier gas, reagents, drain, exhaust and vent fittings have to be fitted with the
correct orientation. Failure to do so will have an impact on the system operation and analysis responses.
Figure 11 shows the fitting side and the nut side of SS-316 (stainless steel), PFA and PVDF fittings and their
corresponding correct ferrule orientation.
Figure 11 The correct ferrule orientation of SS-316, PFA and PVDF fittings on BioTector
When tightening brand new stainless steel fittings, first fully insert the tube into the fitting, tighten the nut
initially finger tight, then tighten a further 1¼ turns using an appropriate size spanner or an adjustable wrench.
Stainless steel fittings used on 1/8” PFA tubing should be tightened only a further ¾ turns after finger tight.
When re-tightening stainless steel fittings, which were already tightened during reassembly or after service,
initially tighten the nut up to the point it was tightened previously, then tighten slightly more using an
appropriate size spanner or an adjustable wrench.
When tightening brand new PFA fittings, first fully insert the tube into the fitting, tighten the nut initially finger
tight, then tighten a further ½ turn using an appropriate size spanner or an adjustable wrench. When retightening PFA fittings, which were already tightened during reassembly or after service, initially tighten the
nut up to the point it was tightened previously, then tighten slightly more using an appropriate size spanner or
an adjustable wrench.
When tightening Swagelok PFA TEE fittings with blue nuts, first fully insert the tube into the fitting, tighten the
nut initially finger tight, then tighten further using an appropriate size spanner or an adjustable wrench until the
nut stops or until it is not possible to tighten the nut any further. These TEE fittings with blue nuts, used on the
1/8” PFA tubing, contain only one ferrule with no back cutting ring or no back ferrule. Acid and Base pump
fittings, which also contain one CTFE ferrule, should be tightened fully finger tight, assuring a strong
connection.
Page 58
5.3.1 Air Supply Connection
The recommended air quality for BioTector is -20°C dew point, free of water, oil and dust. A filter pack may be
required to meet or exceed the air quality specification.
BioTector Air Compressor can be supplied by BioTector distributors as an
option.
The air can be supplied to BioTector from:
A) An existing instrument air supply line
B) BioTector Air Compressor
The required instrument air supply pressure is 1.5 bars. The minimum air supply flow rate is 8.4 m3/hour at
1.5 bar. The average air consumption is less than 5.4 m3/hour, and typically 3.6 m3/hour during online
operation.
Figure 12 below illustrates the two options for air supply: A) from BioTector Air Compressor, or B) from an
existing instrument air supply line.
Figure 12 BioTector air supply options
Page 59
5.3.2 Reagent Connections
Special precautions are needed when working with chemical reagents, both
when renewing reagents and when dealing with leaks or spills. Some reagents
can cause chemical burns and may cause injury or death if swallowed. Please
refer to the symbols and codes on the reagent containers.
DANGER
Use of 20 or 25 liter containers is recommended for each BioTector reagents. Figure 13 below shows the
correct setup and connection of BioTector reagents: Acid (6.0 N Sulfuric Acid containing 350 mg/l Manganese
Sulphate Monohydrate) and Base (4.0 N Sodium Hydroxide). See Section 6
Reagents
and
Calibration Standards for further details.
Figure 13 BioTector reagent setup and connections
Page 60
As can be seen in the figure 13 above, base (Sodium Hydroxide) reagent container does not contain any vent
(breathing) hole. The breathing air into the base container is supplied through the CO 2 filter, which must be
fitted on the base container lid.
Figure 14 below shows the detailed connections on BioTector base reagent. The purpose of the CO 2 filter is
to prevent the base reagent coming in contact with atmospheric CO 2 present in the air. The soda lime inside
the CO2 filter absorbs the atmospheric CO2 and prevents the base reagent getting contaminated. If any vent
hole is accidentally drilled on the lid of the base container and if the fittings are not connected correctly on the
base reagent, contamination will occur and the background CO2 readings will increase.
Figure 14 BioTector Sodium Hydroxide reagent dip tube setup
The vent port on the acid reagent dip tube should not be isolated or blocked. Failure to do so may cause the
container to collapse and leak.
The length of the dip tubes in all reagent containers should be adjusted correctly for the optimum usage of the
reagents. If HCl acid is used, stainless steel (SS-316) weights/filters should not be used in the reagent. The
recommended weights/filters for such reagents are PFA.
Page 61
5.4
Sample, Drain and Exhaust Connections
5.4.1 Sample Inlet Tube Position
For the fittings to remain leak proof, they must be kept clean and should not be
over tightened. Over tightening of the fittings will damage them and cause
eventual leakage.
Caution
BioTector operates on unfiltered samples, the setup of the sampling point is important for the correct
operation of the system. BioTector can handle soft particulates up to 100µm in diameter, however hard
particulates (e.g. sand) will damage the analyzer and should be removed from the sample.
The sample tubing length between the sample intake point and the BioTector sample port should be 2.5
meters exactly. The height of the sample chamber should be between 100mm and 500mm below the
BioTector. BioTector in fact can draw samples from distances greater than 2.5 meters however, such
distances may have an impact on the Sample Pump tubing life and may require changes in system
configuration settings for the correct operation of the system. The point where the sample is taken from
should not be pressurized. The sample inlet and outlet should be at ambient pressure. The sample
temperature should be between 2°C and 60°C (36°F - 140°F). The required minimum sample volume is
100ml per sample. The drain tube should be placed to a well ventilated area at ambient pressure and it
should not be subjected to any back pressure. Figure 15 and 16 illustrate the correct positioning and setup of
the BioTector sample tube in various/optional sampling systems.
Figure 15 BioTector sample tube position in various sampling systems
Page 62
Page 63
5.4.2 Drain and Exhaust Connections
The BioTector should be installed in a well-ventilated area with the exhaust port
piped to an external vent. The installation should be carried out in accordance
with Section 1
Safety Precautions.
WARNING
All BioTector drain tubing must be positioned correctly so that any liquid pumped will drip freely into a larger
drain chamber. The correct positioning and setup of the drain ports prevent liquid accumulation and
measurement errors. All drain ports should be directed to a well ventilated area as oxygen and other gases
may be released during the analysis. The drain tubes should be at atmospheric pressure and should not be
subjected to any back pressure as this may result in measurement errors. The exhaust tube should be piped
out to a well ventilated area as oxygen and other gases will be released during the analysis. The end of this
tube should be positioned in a downward position so that water condensation and freezing will not occur
during winter months. Figure 16 illustrates BioTector connections including the Sample, Manual grab sample,
Sample Out (drain) and the Exhaust connections.
Figure 16 BioTector drain and exhaust connections
Page 64
Section 6
6.1
Reagents and Calibration Standards
Reagents
BioTector TOC analyzer uses the following reagents:
I. Acid: 6.0 N Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) Reagent containing 350 mg/l Manganese Sulfate Monohydrate
II. Base: 4.0 N Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) Reagent
Reagents should not contain high levels of organics, nitrates and phosphates. Ideally, the level of organics,
nitrates and phosphates should be less than 100 g/l (ppb) in the deionized water used to prepare TOC
analyzer reagents.
Acid and Base reagents are stable up to 1 year. The reagents must be stored in a safe and secure location,
where the temperature does not drop below 2°C, in compliance with the local regulations. Table 6 below
summarizes the total days each BioTector TOC Analyzer reagent lasts at various system configurations:
Table 6 BioTector TOC Analyzer Reagent Consumption
REAGENTS
Acid
Base
Container Size
(Liters)
TOTAL DAYS REAGENT LASTS
19
19
239
239
Above table is derived from several online operation parameters such as 100% online time.
Recommended bunds (reagent spill trays) to contain above quantity reagents are 1x 50 Liters.
Page 65
6.2
Calibration Standards
All hygroscopic chemicals in crystal form should be dried in an oven set at 105°C for 3
hours to remove any traces of absorbed water. All prepared solutions must be mixed
thoroughly with a magnetic stirrer or inverted manually at least ten times or until all
crystals are completely dissolved inside the solution.
Caution
The following compounds can be used to prepare calibration standard solutions in BioTector.
To prepare a 1000mgC/l Total Organic Carbon (TOC) standard solution, use one of the following:
• Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate, C8H5KO4, 2.13g (99.9% purity) in one liter of deionized water. Water
solubility: 80 g/L at 20°C.
• Acetic acid, C2H4O2, 2.51g (99.8% purity) in one liter of deionized water. Water solubility: Miscible in
all proportions.
• Glucose, C6H12O6, 2.53g (99% purity) in one liter of deionized water. Water solubility: 512g/L at 25°C.
To prepare a 1000mgC/l Total Inorganic Carbon (TIC) standard solution, use one of the following:
• Sodium Carbonate, CNa2O3, 8.84g (99.9% purity) in one liter of deionized water.
• Sodium Hydrogen Carbonate, CHNaO3, 7.04g (99.5% purity) in one liter of deionized water.
• Potassium Carbonate, CK2O3, 11.62g (99.0% purity) in one liter of deionized water.
The quantity of concentrated chemical required to prepare stock calibration solutions
will change with the % purity of the chemical used. If the purity of the chemical is
different than the figures displayed above, the necessary quantity needs to be
recalculated from the purity of the chemical. See example in the following page.
Caution
Depending on the system analysis ranges (see System Range Data menu), every
BioTector requires specific calibration standard solutions. The required concentration of
the calibration standard solutions can be identified in Span Calibration menu.
Page 66
The calculation of the quantities required to prepare Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate (KHP) standard solutions
with various purities are given as an example below:
Name:
Formula:
Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate
C8H5KO4
Carbon, 12
Oxygen, 16
Potassium, 39
Hydrogen, 1
Total weight
x8
x4
x1
x5
=
=
=
=
=
96
64
39
5____________
204.22 g/mol
47% of KHP is Carbon. Purity of the KHP is 99.9%. Therefore, to prepare a 1000 mgC/l standard solution,
add 2.13g of KHP in a flask and add enough deionized water to make it exactly 1 liter solution.
Note that the quantities required change with the % purity of the chemical used. Table 8 below gives the KHP
quantities required at various % purity for the preparation of 1000mgC/l calibration standard.
Table 8 Quantity of KHP required to prepare 1000 mgC/l standard at various purities.
% Purity of KHP
Quantity of KHP (grams)
to prepare 1000 mgC/l Standard
100
2.127
99.9
2.129
99.5
2.138
99.0
2.149
95.0
2.239
90.0
2.364
To prepare standard solutions containing more than 1000 mgC/l, the required solvent can be mixed directly
with deionized water. Table 9 below gives the required quantity of KHP for various concentration standard
solutions to be mixed with deionized water and added enough deionized water to make the solution exactly 1
liter.
Table 9 Quantity of KHP required to prepare various concentration TOC standard solutions.
TOC Standard Solution
Quantity of 99.9% KHP (grams)
Concentration (mgC/l)
to be added into 1 Liter DIW
1000
2.129
1250
2.661
1500
3.194
2000
4.258
5000
10.645
10000
21.290
Page 67
Preparation of Calibration Standard Solutions:
Use eye protection and gloves.
Standards solutions greater than 1000mg/l can be prepared directly without any dilution by simply mixing the
necessary quantity solvent or salt with deionized water. Standard solutions below 1000mg/l concentration
should be prepared by dilution technique. First a 1000mg/l standard stock solution should be prepared, and
then the required lower concentration standard solution should be prepared by applying the necessary dilution
procedures:
➢
For example, to prepare a 50mgC/l TOC only standard solution, first weigh 50 grams of the
1000mgC/l stock standard. Add 50 grams of the 1000mgC/l standard into a one-liter flask and add
enough deionized water to make the solution exactly 1 liter.
➢
For increased accuracy, standard solutions below 5mg/l (ppm) concentration should be prepared with
two or more steps dilution. For example, to prepare a 1mgC/l standard, first prepare a 100mgC/l
standard by adding 100 grams of the 1000mgC/l standard into a one-liter flask and by adding enough
deionized water to make it exactly a 1 liter solution. Then add 10 grams of the 100mgC/l standard into
a one-liter flask and add enough deionized water to make it exactly 1 liter.
➢
Standard solutions at μg/l (ppb) levels should be prepared with several dilution steps. For instance, a
1mgC/l (1000 μg/l) standard should be prepared with two or more steps dilution as described above.
To prepare a 50μg/l standard, add 50 grams of the 1000μg/l standard into a one-liter flask, and add
enough deionized water to make it exactly 1 liter.
Shelf Life and Storage of Calibration Standard Solutions:
❖
TOC standards prepared from Potassium Hydrogen Phthalate is typically stable for a month once it
is kept in a closed glass container and refrigerated at 4°C.
❖
All other standards such as TOC prepared with Acetic Acid and TIC standards are recommended to
be used within 48 hours of manufacture.
Page 68
Section 7
Analyzer Commissioning and Startup
The check list below must be used to ensure that the installation has been properly carried out. Please
proceed through the check list in the given order, completing the 5 sections below. Detailed commissioning
and startup procedures are available in a presentation format in the MMC/SD card shipped with the
BioTector. It is recommended to review this document before starting the commissioning and startup
procedures. If the BioTector analyzer is certified for hazardous areas, carefully read the hazardous area
documentation supplied with the analyzer. This documentation contains important information for compliance
with explosion protection regulations. Understanding this information is essential for the safe operation of the
equipment.
For system and personal safety, refer to Section 1
Safety Precautions. Necessary
safety precautions, such as wearing eye protection and gloves, should be taken throughout the
commissioning and startup procedures.
_____
1. INSPECTION and SYSTEM CONNECTIONS:
FMM20 reagent pumps and reagent tubes are filled with deionized water (DIW), and several other
tubing are disconnected and labeled in the BioTector for shipping. Before connecting any tubing,
inspect the analyzer. Remove the three nuts and open the analysis door. Check all the electrical
and tubing connections and confirm that there are no loose connections within the BioTector.
Close the analysis door.
•
Disconnect the PFA tube at the top of the acid TEE. This PFA tube connects the acid
TEE and the base TEE in a loop. Drain the DIW from the TEE connectors and PFA tube
into a suitable container and dispose. Remove the blank fitting, which is located above
the Reactor Valve, from the TEE connector. Reconnect the free end of the previously
disconnected tube to the TEE where the blank fitting was located.
•
Remove the PFA tubing loop, which connects the acid and base ports, located outside
the BioTector. Drain the DIW from the PFA tubing into a suitable container and dispose.
The nuts and ferrules, located on these ports, will be used for the acid and base
connections. FMM20 reagent pumps, which have a 50µm particle tolerance, and the
reagent tubing, must be kept free from dust and particulates.
•
Reconnect the tube linking the Ozone Generator to the acid TEE, at the TEE.
• Reconnect the tube linking the Cooler and CO2 analyzer, at the top of the Cooler.
The tubing of Sample Pump is disconnected and labeled in BioTector for shipping. Reconnect the
Sample Pump tubing.
_____
_____
_____
Check the Swagelok / PFA tube connections and confirm there are no loose connections within
the BioTector.
_____
Confirm the mains supply voltage and the frequency on site match the analyzer requirements.
Remove the cover of the Power and Input/Output Board by sliding the cover from left to right
slightly. Connect the power cable. Install the supplied ferrite by winding the power cable once
around the ferrite, forming a single loop (see figure 1 and table 2 in Section 4.1.1
Analysis
Enclosure).
_____
Connect the 4-20mA cables. Install the supplied ferrite on the 4-20mA cables by winding the 420mA cables once around the ferrite, forming a single loop.
_____
Connect low voltage wiring (e.g. Fault Relay).
_____
Connect the air supply to the BioTector’s AIR port. See figure 12 in Section 5.3.1 Air
Supply
Connection for details. The minimum air supply flow rate is 8.4 m 3/hour at 1.5 bar. The average
air consumption is less than 5.4 m3/hour, and typically 3.6 m 3/hour during online operation. When
the oxygen concentrator is running, the pressure typically cycles from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar.
Option A: Instrument air. The set point pressure of the air, supplied from an existing
instrument air supply line, should be 1.5 bar. The recommended air quality
is -20°C dew point, free of water, oil and dust.
Option B: BioTector Compressor. The set point air pressure supplied from BioTector
compressor should be 1.2 bar.
_____
Page 69
In BioTectors built with a vortex cooler, air should be supplied to the vortex cooler using a
regulator, which is dedicated for the vortex cooler only.
Connect the EXHAUST port with ¼” PFA tube to a safe and well ventilated area or to open
atmosphere. The tube must have no restrictions and it must be placed so that any condensation
and liquid buildup in the tubing is prevented. The maximum length of ¼” PFA tubing installed in
Exhaust line is 10 meters. If tubing longer than 10 meters is required, the use of a larger ID tubing
or pipe is recommended.
The end of the exhaust tubing should have a slight downward slope and should be located in an
environment so that any condensation or liquid at the outlet of the tubing cannot freeze during
cold weather. See figure 16 in Section 5.4.2
Drain and Exhaust Connections for details.
_____
Remove the tapes, which are used to seal the ends of the supplied CO 2 filter. Fit the CO2 filter to
the Base container and seal the Base container tightly. See figure 13 and figure 14 in Section
5.3.2 Reagent Connections for details.
_____
Connect the Acid (6.0 N Sulfuric Acid, H2SO4, containing 350 mg/l Manganese catalyst) and Base
(4.0 N Sodium Hydroxide, NaOH) containers to the BioTector’s ACID and BASE ports with 1/8”
PFA tube. ~20 liter reagents last more than 6 months. Confirm that weight fittings (which contain
70 micron filters) supplied are installed at the end of the acid and base reagent dip tubes.
_____
Confirm the sample or samples are supplied to the analyzer from a sample chamber and are at
ambient pressure. See examples in figures 15 and 16 in Section 5.4
Sample,
Drain
and
Exhaust Connections for the correct positioning and setup of the BioTector sample tube in various
sampling systems. Locate the sample chamber within 2.5 meters of the BioTector. The sample
tubing length between the sample intake point and the BioTector SAMPLE port should be 2.5
meters exactly. The height of the sample chamber should be between 100mm and 500mm below
the BioTector.
_____
Referring to typical examples in figures 15 and 16 in Section 5.4 Sample, Drain and Exhaust
Connections, connect the sample or samples to the BioTector with ¼” PFA tube. These ports are
labeled as SAMPLE 1 and if installed SAMPLE 2 etc.
_____
If a BioTector SAMPLER has been supplied with the system, connect the sampler in accordance
with the drawings and instructions in the sampler user manual.
_____
If a SIGMATAX SAMPLER has been supplied with the system, connect the sampler in
accordance with the technical drawings and instructions in the BioTector and Sigmatax user
manuals. Connect the sample tubing (using the 1/4 to 1/8 inches reducing union/connector fitting)
and the Fiber Optic cable, coming from the Sigmatax Sampler, to the BioTector.
_____
Connect the SAMPLE OUT port with ¼” PFA tube to well ventilated pressure free drain. The
tubing length between the drain and the BioTector SAMPLE OUT port should be maximum 2
meters. The tube should be fitted so that it cannot freeze in cold weather. See figure 16 in Section
5.4.2 Drain and Exhaust Connections for details.
_____
If fitted, connect ¼” PFA tube to the MANUAL or CALIBRATION ports. Remove all tapes placed
around the fittings for shipment. The tubing length between the manual grab sample intake point
or calibration standard solution and the BioTector MANUAL/CALIBRATION ports should be
between 2 and 2.5 meters. The height of the manual grab sample or calibration solution should be
between 100mm and 500mm below the BioTector.
_____
If the BioTector is supplied as a “purge ready” system, connect the -20°C dew point, oil, water and
dust free purge air to the ¼” Swagelok fitting located on the metal plate on the top left hand side
of the BioTector enclosure. The purge air is instrument air which is typically at 60 L/min flow, and
filtered with a 40 microns or smaller filter. The purge ready system is supplied with an air outlet
port “vent” where the purge air is discharged.
_____
2. POWER UP:
Power up the analyzer. Go to Operation, Time & Date menu and adjust the time and the date.
Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2
_____
Simulate ), check the following:
Confirm that the Exhaust and Reactor Valves are working.
_____
Page 70
Confirm that the Sample Valve is working.
_____
If installed, confirm that all other valves (e.g. multi-stream valve) are working.
_____
Check the air supply pressure. The set point pressure should be 1.5 bar. When the oxygen
concentrator is running, the pressure typically cycles from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar. Check the O2
PRESSURE SENSOR in O2-Controller Status menu. The pressure should be between 390
mbar and 400 mbar at the idle 1 l/h “Mass Flow Controller” MFC FLOW. At 60 l/h MFC
SETPOINT flow, the pressure should not be less than 320 mbar. See Section 8.1.6
Oxygen Controller Status for details.
_____
Oxygen Purity Test: Power up the system for at least 10 minutes before the oxygen purity test is
carried out. Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2 Simulate) set the MFC (see figure 2 and
table 2 in Section 4.1.1 Analysis Enclosure) flow to 10 l/h and flow oxygen gas through the CO2
analyzer for 5 minutes. At the end of this period, the CO 2 analyzer zero reading (ppm CO2)
should be within ±0.5% of full scale of the CO2 analyzer range. For instance, if the CO2 analyzer
range is 10000ppm, then the CO2 analyzer zero reading should be typically within ±50ppm. Go to
CO2 Analyzer menu (see section 8.3.10 CO2 Analyzer) to view the CO2 Analyzer Range.
_____
(If the CO2 analyzer zero reading is outside the specifications, confirm that there is no CO 2 in the oxygen gas
by connecting the CO2 filter “used with the sodium hydroxide reagent container” between the Cooler and
CO2 analyzer inlet port and set the MFC to 10 l/h. As the size of the CO2 filter is small, keep the 10 l/h gas
flow running for at least for 5 minutes and record the CO2 zero readings at the end of the 5 minute period. If
the CO2 zero readings do not drop significantly with the CO2 filter in place, this will indicate that there is no
CO2 contamination in the oxygen supply.)
3. PUMP TESTS:
Caution! Below procedures involves handling strong acid and base reagents. Necessary safety precautions,
such as wearing eye protection and gloves, should be taken throughout these tests.
Go to Zero Calibration menu and select RUN REAGENTS PURGE function to prime the pumps.
The factory Reagents Purge settings to prime reagents typically cover ~3 meters distance
between the reagent containers and the BioTector. If it is necessary to increase the reagent purge
times, see section 8.3.4.4Reagents Purge for details.
__
(If the reagent lines do not fill during the Reagents Purge cycle, stop the BioTector to prime the pumps _____
__
manually. Remove the dip tubes from the reagent containers, and seal the containers. Place the dip tubes _
into a small container containing DIW. If DIW is not available use tap water. Raise the container above the
height of the BioTector. Go to Zero Calibration menu and select RUN REAGENTS PURGE function to prime
the pumps. Once the pumps have been primed, reinstall the dip tubes into the reagent containers and repeat
the Reagents Purge cycle.)
Confirm the Acid Pump is pumping correctly using a 10ml graduated cylinder. Run the Acid Pump
in Simulate menu. Acid Pump rate for FMM20 Pump at 400 pulses should be between 4.20 ml
and 3.80 ml. (Depending on the quantity of the liquid injected into the reactor and due to an internal system
_____
interlock, the system may request the activation of Reactor Purge cycle to purge any excess liquid from the
reactor. If necessary run “REACTOR PURGE” function in the same menu.)
Confirm the Base Pump is pumping correctly. Base Pump rate for FMM20 Pump at 400 pulses
should be between 4.20 ml and 3.80 ml.
_____
Important Note: For the correct operation of the system, the measured Acid and Base Pump rates must be
identical or similar. The maximum allowable difference in the measured volumes for acid and base injections
above should not be more than 0.2ml.
Confirm the WMM60 Sample Pump is pumping correctly. The pump rate at 16 pulses should be
between 5.5ml and 7.5ml in ~8 seconds. (Any variation between these pumped volumes is corrected
_____
when the zero and span calibration is carried out.)
Page 71
4. COMMISSIONING MENU SETTINGS:
Using the Commissioning menus (see Section 8.2
COMMISSIONING
procedures to set up the BioTector for specific site requirements:
MENU),
follow
In Reaction Time menu, program the INTERVAL time depending on the required sample analysis
frequency.
below
_____
In Sample Pump menu, set the correct Sample Pump FORWARD and REVERSE times. These
times are unique for each site depending on the distance between the sample and the BioTector.
Sample Pump times can be set individually for each stream in the Sample Pump menu. Adjust the
Sample Pump FORWARD times and confirm that sample liquid coming from each stream
bypasses the system and drips into the drain.
In order to establish the required Sample Pump forward and reverse times, go to Simulate menu
and run SAMPLE PUMP reverse (REV) and confirm that the sample tube is completely empty.
Run SAMPLE PUMP forward (FWD) and measure the time (in seconds) required for a fresh
sample to fill and flow out through the bypass port. Add 10 seconds to the measured time and
enter this value as the FORWARD time in the Sample Pump menu. The sample pump REVERSE
time will be automatically set as 10 seconds greater than the FORWARD time.
_____
Go to Process Test, Sample Pump Test menu and select the PUMP FORWARD TEST and PUMP
REVERSE TEST functions to confirm that the programmed sample pump times are correct to
properly fill and empty the sample tube of each stream.
_____
If the BioTector SAMPLER is used, then the default sampler time is 100s. This default time must
not be changed unless the time programmed in the PLC of the sampler is also changed. See
BioTector Sampler User Manual for details.
_____
In Stream Program menu, set the required multi-stream parameters (stream operation sequence,
number of reactions to run at each stream and operation range for each stream). Automatic range
change function should not be used in multi-stream systems.
_____
In COD/BOD/DW program menu, if COD, BOD and/or DW (Drinking Water) parameters are
required, program DISPLAY with the required parameter. Install the relevant STREAM, TOC
FACTOR, DETENTION TIME, TOC levels and % REMOVAL values for applicable streams. See
Section 8.2.4 COD/BOD/DW Program for details. If required, the factors for each stream can be
_____
obtained following the procedures described in information sheet “I030. TOC to COD or BOD Correlation
Method”, which is available in the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector.
In New Reagents Program menu, confirm the factory settings are suitable for site requirements.
_____
In Reagents Monitor menu, if required, activate/deactivate the reagent monitoring function,
program the reagent volumes and set the relevant reagent warnings.
_____
In Autocal Program menu, if required, program the automatic zero and span calibration cycles.
_____
In 4-20mA Program menu, set the required parameter for each stream. Set the full scale
concentration level for each 4-20mA channel. Full scale should be compatible with the external
process control device (e.g. DCS) and BioTector calibrated ranges. In order to see BioTector
calibrated ranges, see System Range Data screen (2.2.3 System Range Data Screen) and Stream
Program menu (8.2.3 Stream Program).
_____
In Alarm Program menu, set the available relays to the required ALARM levels for each stream. If
necessary, to modify the relay parameters and conditions, go to Output Devices menu. See
section 8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
_____
Go to Signal Simulate menu and test 4-20mA signals. Simulate 1mA, 4mA, 12mA and 20mA
signals and confirm that the signals are received by the external process control device (e.g.
DCS). Simulate all digital input and output signals and confirm correct operation.
_____
Page 72
5. ZERO and SPAN CALIBRATION:
Go to Operation, Reagents Setup, Install New Reagents menu, confirm the menu items and select
the “START NEW REAGENT CYCLE” function for the BioTector to prime the reagents and set the
Zero Adjust (zero offset) values automatically. See Section 2.2.2.1
Install New Reagents
and 8.2.5
New Reagents Program for details.
_____
Observe that the automatic pressure/flow test passes when analyzer is started up. See Section
2.1.3 Analysis Data Screen and 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program for details.
_____
It is recommended to check the zero response. When the Zero Calibration cycle is completed, go
to Operation, Start Stop menu (see Section 2.2.1
Start Stop for details) and stop the
analyzer. Go to Zero Calibration menu and select RUN ZERO CHECK function. Alternatively, to
confirm that the zero response is correct, connect DIW to the manual sample port and run 5
analysis cycles on DIW using the Manual Program menu. (If manual port is not available, use the input
_____
point for SAMPLE 1. If the BioTector has been in storage for a long period, and if the zero readings are not
satisfactory, a second “Install New Reagents” cycle may be required.)
If the zero readings and CO2 peaks are correct, items from 1 to 6 below can be skipped.
_____
1
Confirm that the pH in the reactor is correct, using the test sequence in the pH Test menu. See
Section 8.1.1.5 pH Test for details.
_____
2
Check for a pH of <2 during the TIC phase.
_____
3
Check for a pH of >12 during the Base Oxidation phase.
_____
4
Check for a pH of <2 during the TOC phase.
_____
5
Run a further 2 reactions on DIW.
_____
6
Run an “Install New Reagents” cycle on the system to adjust the zero offset.
_____
Program the concentration of the standard solution in the Span Calibration menu (2.3.2 Span
Calibration). The concentration of the calibration standard used must be typically greater than 50%
of the full scale of the RANGE the calibration is carried out. In order to see BioTector calibrated
ranges, see System Range Data screen (2.2.3 System Range Data Screen). (To prepare a
_____
standard solution, see procedures described in Section 6.2
Calibration Standards or information sheet
“R009. Standard Solutions for BioTector Multi-component Analyzer”, which is available inside the MMC/SD
card shipped with the BioTector.)
Connect the standard solution to the MANUAL/CALIBRATION port. If these ports are not
available, use the SAMPLE 1 port. It is recommended that the standard solution should be located
at the same height as the sample chamber. Run the Span Calibration cycle using the RUN SPAN
CALIBRATION function in Span Calibration menu. A minimum of five complete analysis cycles is
recommended for the span calibration.
_____
Download BioTector “All Data” in text format into the MMC/SD card using the SEND ALL DATA
function in Data Output menu to record all changes made in the system configuration. See Section
8.1.4 Data Output for details.
_____
Go to Start Stop menu and start the BioTector. When the BioTector is running online, carefully
observe the first two or three reactions and confirm that the CO 2 peaks are correct.
_____
Page 73
Section 8
Maintenance Menu
Maintenance Menu Diagram
Page 74
8.1
DIAGNOSTICS MENU
This group of menu allows the user to access the Process Test, Simulate, Data Output, Input/Output Status
and Service menus for diagnostic purposes.
Diagnostics Menu Diagram
Page 75
8.1.1 Process Test
This group of menus allows the user to simulate the Pressure Test, Flow Test, Ozone Test, Sample Pump
Test and pH Test routines. In BioTector, when the user enters the Process Test menus, where the oxygen
gas flow will be required, the oxygen generator starts to operate automatically. Detailed Process Test
procedures are available in the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector. It is recommended to review these
documents for troubleshooting purposes when necessary.
8.1.1.1
Pressure Test
P R E S S U R E
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1 < * P R E S S U R E
T E S T
2
P R E S S U R I Z E
R E A C T O R
T
M
M
S
I
F
F
T
M E
C
S E T P O I N T
C
F L O W
A T U S
P R E S S
E S C
T O
6
4
0
T
0
0
3
E
s
. 0 l / h
. 3 l / h
S T I N G
A B O R T
T H E
T E S T
This menu enables the user to simulate the Pressure Test. The menu also shows the current status of the
Mass Flow Controller. Any settings made by the user in this menu are automatically reset when the user exits
this menu.
1. Pressure Test. Use this function to simulate the Pressure Test. When the Pressure Test is activated, an
“*” will be shown, and a small menu will display the following data:
Time:
MFC Setpoint:
MFC Flow:
Status:
The time for the pressure test is 60 seconds. This time shows the time left to the end
of the test.
This is the BioTector mass flow controller flow setting (40 l/h by default) for the
pressure test.
This is the actual flow from the mass flow controller. Initially the setpoint and flow will
match, and if there is no gas leak, after about 25 seconds the flow will fall to close to
zero.
At the end of the test, the status below is shown:
TESTING:
Test in progress.
PASS:
The Pressure Test finished its cycle with a flow below the Pass
(Pressure Test Warning) level (4 l/h by default).
WARNING:
The Pressure Test finished its cycle with a flow above the Pass
(Pressure Test Warning) level, but below the Fail (Pressure Test
Fault) level (6 l/h by default).
FAIL:
The Pressure Test finished its cycle with a flow above the Fail
(Pressure Test Fault) level (6 l/h by default). See Section 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program for details.
2. Pressurize Reactor. This is similar to the Pressure Test above, but its time has been extended to 999s,
allowing the user to locate any leak there may be on the system. Pass, Warning and Fail are
automatically shown on the screen, depending on the status of the test.
Page 76
8.1.1.2
Flow Test
F L O W
T E S T
1 < * E X H
2
E X H
3
S A M
4
S A M
T
M
M
S
I
F
F
T
A
A
P
P
U
U
L
L
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
S T
T
S T
F
E
O U
E
O U
E S T
L O W
T
T E S T
T
F L O W
M E
C
S E T P O I N T
C
F L O W
A T U S
P R E S S
E S C
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
T O
3
6
5
T
0
0
8
E
s
. 0 l / h
. 3 l / h
S T I N G
A B O R T
T H E
T E S T
This menu enables the user to simulate various Flow Tests through the system. The menu also shows the
current status of the Mass Flow Controller.
1. Exhaust Test. Use this function to simulate the flow through the Exhaust Valve. When the Exhaust Test
is activated, an “*” will be shown, and a small menu will display the following data:
Time:
MFC Setpoint:
MFC Flow:
Status:
The time for the flow test is 30 seconds. This time shows the time left to the end of
the test.
This is the BioTector mass flow controller flow setting (60 l/h by default) for the flow
test.
This is the actual flow from the mass flow controller. If there is no blockage in the
lines, then the setpoint should match the flow.
At the end of the test, the status below is shown:
TESTING:
Test in progress.
PASS:
The Exhaust Test finished its cycle with a flow above the Pass (Flow
Warning) level, which is 45 l/h by default. See Section 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program for details.
WARNING:
The Exhaust Test finished its cycle with a flow below the Pass level
(less than 54 l/h), but above the Fail level (greater than 40 l/h).
FAIL:
The Exhaust Test finished its cycle with a flow below the Fail level,
which is 40 l/h by default.
2. Exhaust Flow. This is similar to the Exhaust Test menu, but its time has been extended to 999s, allowing
the user to locate any blockage in the system. Pass, Warning and Fail are automatically shown on the
screen, depending on the status of the test.
3. Sample Out Test. This is similar to the Exhaust Test. This function allows the user to test the flow
through the Sample Out port (through the Reactor Valve, MV3).
4. Sample Out Flow. This is similar to the Exhaust Flow. This function allows the user to test the flow
through the Sample Out port (through the Reactor Valve, MV3).
Page 77
8.1.1.3
Ozone Test
The ozone test uses the procedure described in information sheet “T020.
Procedure to check the ozone level in BioTector System-C (B3500C)”, which
is available in the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector. The user must
read and understand the processes described in this sheet, and have all the
correct parts listed before carrying out the test.
WARNING
Ozone will be generated when the ozone generator is turned on.
General overview of the operation of the ozone test:
Phase 1: Install the tester according to information sheet T020, and start the test from the menu.
Phase 2: The BioTector carries out a pressure test, to ensure that the system is leak tight.
Phase 3: The ozone generator is switched on, and when the o-ring in the tester breaks, press the stop
test menu item.
Phase 4: There is a purge period that purges any traces of ozone from the ozone tester, and the result
of the test is shown on the screen.
Phase 5: The purge of the tester is complete, and the result remains on the screen.
Ozone Test, Phase 1:
O Z O N E
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1 < * S T A R T
T E S T
2
S T O P
T E S T
This menu enables the user to test the concentration of ozone generated by the BioTector.
1. Start Test. This starts the ozone test.
2. Stop Test. This stops the ozone test. It should be activated when the o-ring in the tester breaks, or at any
time to stop the ozone test.
Ozone Test, Phase 2:
P R E S S U R E
T
M
M
S
I
F
F
T
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
M E
C
S E T P O I N T
C
F L O W
A T U S
P R E S S
E S C
T O
3
4
2
T
5
0
2
E
A B O R T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
s
. 0 l / h
. 0 l / H
S T I N G
T H E
T E S T
This menu enables the user to monitor the progress of the ozone test. To abort the ozone test, press the
ESCAPE key on the keyboard.
Page 78
Ozone Test, Phase 3:
O Z O N E
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
* S T A R T
T E S T
2 <
S T O P
T E S T
T I M E
S T A T U S
5 s
T E S T I N G
O Z O N E
G E N E R A T O R
I S
O N ! ! !
D O
N O T
O P E N
O Z O N E
T E S T E R
The ozone test has now started. DO NOT OPEN THE OZONE TESTER. The user should now move the
cursor down to line 2, and press the ENTER key as soon as the o-ring in the ozone tester breaks. The time
will be calculated automatically.
Ozone Test, Phase 4:
O Z O N E
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
S T A R T
T E S T
2 < * S T O P
T E S T
T I M E
S T A T U S
1 2 s
P A S S
D O
N O T
O P E N
O Z O N E
T E S T E R
U N T I L
P U R G E
O F
O Z O N E
T E S T E R
C O M P L E T E
When the o-ring breaks, immediately select Stop Test and press the ENTER key. The ozone generator is now
switched off, but there will still be traces of ozone in the tester. Therefore the BioTector will purge the tester
for 30s to remove these traces of ozone. DO NOT OPEN THE OZONE TESTER until the warning message is
removed.
The time for the o-ring to break is shown on the screen, as well as the PASS, LOW OZONE or FAIL
message. Note that the maximum allowed time for the ozone test is 60s, after which the FAIL message is
displayed.
Ozone Test, Phase 5:
O Z O N E
T E S T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
S T A R T
T E S T
2 < * S T O P
T E S T
T I M E
S T A T U S
1 2 s
P A S S
The test is complete. The time for the o-ring to break is shown on the screen, as well as the PASS, LOW
OZONE or FAIL message. The Pass, Low Ozone or Fail setting is factory set in the Fault Setup menu.
Page 79
8.1.1.4
Sample Pump Test
S A M P L E
P U M P
1
V A
2 < * P U
3
P U
4
5
- -
T E S T
L V E
M P
F O R W A R D
M P
R E V E R S E
>
S A M P L E
T I M E
S T A T U S
P R E S S
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
S T R E A M
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
T E S T
T E S T
P U M P
6 s
T E S T I N G
E S C
T O
A B O R T
T H E
T E S T
This menu enables the user to test the Sample Pump forward and reverse times. Any settings made by the
user in this menu are automatically reset when the user exits this menu.
1. Valve. Valve allows the user to select the stream or manual sample ports the Sample Pump Test is going
to be carried out. The valve selection may have an effect on the Sample Pump forward time measured
with the Pump Forward Test below, unless all sample lines are at the same length.
2. Pump Forward Test. This function starts the Sample Pump running in the forward direction. When the
sample has been correctly transported to the BioTector, as far as the recommended sample transport
point, or until it drips out into the drain, press ESCAPE. This stops the timer, and provides the user the
correct FORWARD times to be programmed for each stream and manual sample in the Sample Pump
menu (see Section 8.2.2
Sample Pump for details).
3. Pump Reverse Test. This is the same as the Pump Forward Test above, only this time Sample Pump
operates reverse to empty the sample lines back into the corresponding stream selected with the Valve
above.
5. Sample Pump. Sample Pump is a link to the Maintenance, Commissioning, Sample Pump menu (see
Section 8.2.2
Sample Pump for details).
Page 80
8.1.1.5
pH Test
The user must understand the procedure for testing the pH in the BioTector.
Use eye protection and gloves. Have all the relevant parts for this test ready
(primarily beaker and pH paper) before carrying out the test.
WARNING
For the pH test to be accurate, the previous reaction should have finished
normally, so that any liquid carried over from that reaction will not affect the pH
test.
Significant volume of liquid loss, during the pH test phases 1, 2, 3 or 4, may
have an impact on the consecutive pH tests. In such cases, the test must be
stopped at that specific phase, where the significant volume of liquid is lost,
and re-started from pH Test Phase 1 below. When the pH test is re-started, the
corresponding pH measurements can be skipped for the previous valid tests.
General overview of the operation of the pH test:
The description below is for the TIC & TOC mode.
Phase 1: Prepare the test equipment, and start the test.
Phase 2: The BioTector carries out a normal startup operation, including ozone purge, reactor purge,
pressure test and flow test to ensure that the system is purged and leak tight.
Phase 3: The TIC acid and sample are added into the reactor, mixed and then the program pauses, to
allow the pH to be tested.
Phase 4: The base is added to the solution in the reactor, and then the program pauses, to allow the
pH to be tested.
Phase 5: The TOC acid is added to the solution in the reactor, and then the program pauses, to allow
the pH to be tested.
Phase 6: The reactor and CO2 analyzer are purged.
pH Test, Phase 1:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
This menu enables the user to test the pH in the BioTector.
1. Range, Valve. Select the range and the stream or manual sample point the pH test is going to run on.
This function has an effect on the volume of sample, acid and base used for the test.
2. Mode. Depending on the analysis type of the BioTector, the test mode can be selected as TIC+TOC
mode, TC mode or TIC REACTOR mode. In TIC & TOC systems, the only available test mode is TIC &
TOC. In TC systems, the only available test mode is TC. If the BioTector is a VOC system, the user can
choose to run the test in either TIC+TOC or TC modes.
Page 81
3. Start Test. This starts the pH test routine, which goes through the 6 phases described above.
4. Take Sample. Not applicable until the test is running.
5. Continue to next phase. Not applicable until the test is running.
6. Stop Test. When the test is running, activating this control will stop the test. Note that some phases have
to be completed before the stop can be used.
P H
T E S T
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
C O N F I R M
P R E V I O U S
C O R R E C T L Y .
P R E S S
E S C
T O
E X I T
1
P H A S E
R E A C T I O N
E N T E R
T O
F I N I S H E D
C O N F I R M ,
For the pH test to be accurate, the previous reaction should have finished normally, so that any liquid
carried over from that reaction will not affect the pH test. Therefore, when the start test menu item has
been activated, a confirmation will be required. If the previous reaction did not finish normally, then liquid
remaining in the reactor may interfere with the test and give incorrect pH test results.
pH Test, Phase 2:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1 5 s
O Z O N E
C O 2 =
W A I T
T O
P H A S E
1
P H A S E
T I M E
P H A S E
M F C =
3 9 . 3 l / h
T E S T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
P U R G E
1 5 0 . 8 p p M
C O M P L E T E
After the pH test has been started, the BioTector carries out a normal startup operation, including ozone
purge, reactor purge, pressure test and flow test to ensure that the system is purged and leak tight. This
phase cannot be stopped, and requires about 210 seconds to run.
Page 82
pH Test, Phase 3:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
T I M E
P H A S E
M F C =
T E S T
W H E N
F R O M
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
0 s
P A U S E D
C O 2 =
1 5 0 . 8 p p M
0 . 0 l / h
T I C
p H .
E X P E C T E D
F I N I S H E D ,
S E L E C T
M E N U .
p H < 2 .
N E X T
A C T I O N
At this phase, the TIC acid and sample are added into the reactor and mixed together. The system then
pauses to allow the pH to be tested. The user now has 3 options:
4. Take Sample. It can be difficult to take a representative sample as the base reagent is injected prior to
this test. When the tubing at the changeover port of the Reactor Valve is removed, it is recommended that
a few drops of liquid is discharged manually from the reactor by tipping this tubing gently down and then
measure the pH of the mixture with a pH paper.
5. Continue To Next Phase. If this is selected, the program continues to the next phase.
6. Stop Test. If this is selected, the program jumps to the reactor purge phase.
pH Test, Phase 4:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
T I M E
P H A S E
M F C =
T E S T
W H E N
F R O M
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
0 . 0 l / h
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
0 s
P A U S E D
C O 2 =
1 5 0 . 8 p p M
B A S E
p H .
E X P E C T E D
p H > 1 2 .
F I N I S H E D ,
S E L E C T
N E X T
A C T I O N
M E N U .
At this phase, the base is added to the solution in the reactor and mixed together. The program then pauses
to allow the pH to be tested. The user now has 3 options, which are the same as in the previous phase.
Page 83
pH Test, Phase 5:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
T I M E
P H A S E
M F C =
T E S T
W H E N
F R O M
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
0 s
P A U S E D
C O 2 =
1 5 0 . 8 p p M
0 . 0 l / h
T O C
p H .
E X P E C T E D
F I N I S H E D ,
S E L E C T
M E N U .
p H < 2 .
N E X T
A C T I O N
At this phase, the TOC acid is added to the solution in the reactor and mixed together. The system then
pauses to allow the pH to be tested. The user now has 3 options. Option 4 is used to take the sample as
before, but both options 5 and 6 below will end the test, as the TOC acid check is the last phase in the cycle.
5. Continue To Next Phase. If this is selected, the program continues to the next phase, which is the
reactor purge phase.
6. Stop Test. If this is selected, the program jumps to the reactor purge phase.
As the next phase is the reactor purge phase, the user is prompted to confirm that all tubes have been reconnected before the BioTector starts this phase.
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
C O N F I R M
A L L
T U B E S
R E - C O N N E C T E D
C O R R E C T L Y .
P R E S S
R I G H T
A R R O W
T O
C O N F I R M .
pH Test, Phase 6:
P H
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
T E S T
R
M
S
T
C
S
A
O
T
A
O
T
N
D
A
K
N
O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
G E , V A
E
R T
T E
E
S A M
T I N U E
P
T E S
T I M E
P H A S E
M F C =
L V E
S T
P L E
T O
T
0 . 0 l / h
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1
,
S T R E A M
T I C + T O C
N E X T
1
P H A S E
0 s
C O M P L E T E
C O 2 =
1 5 0 . 8 p p M
The pH test is complete. The BioTector will purge the reactor and the CO2 analyzer. The user can either exit
the menu or start the pH test again.
Page 84
8.1.2 Simulate
S I M U L A T E
M F C =
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 0 . 0 l / h
1 < * M F C
2
O Z O N E
G E
3
O Z O N E
G E
4
A C I D
P U M
5
B A S E
P U M
6
S A M P L E
P
7
R E A C T O R
8
S A M P L E
V
9
R E A C T O R
1 0
E X H A U S T
1 1
C L E A N I N G
▼
N
N
P
P
U
M
A
V
V
C O 2 =
E R A T O R
E R A T O R
M
O
L
A
A
V
P
T
V
L
L
A
O
E
V
V
L
F A N
R
E
E
V E
S I M U L A T E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C
* S
M
* C
* C
* S
S
S
S
T
S
L
R
R
A
T
A
O
O
Y
A
A
A
E
A
E
E
U
L
R
N
O
O
S
M
M
M
M
M
A
A
N
- - >
I
E
U
L
L
T
P
P
P
P
P
K
C
.
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
3 5 . 0 p p m
0 l / h
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
M F C = 1 0 . 0 l / h
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 0
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
B
A
A
E
E
E
L
L
L
.
L
R
M
L
R
R
M
E
E
E
C O 2 =
A T I O N
V A L V E
V A L V E
V A L V E
R
R
R
S
E
D E
T O R
R E A
F A N
F A N
F I
E M
E R
W I T
S E N
T E C
P U
G E N
L
P
R
C
S
T
R
T
L
T
O
H
O
O
G
Y
R
R
R
E
P U R G E
I N P U T / O U T P U T
O
1
O
A
O
O
O
O
O
A
O
O
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
,
,
,
,
,
1 . 0 0 A
5 . 0 0 V
1
1
1
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
3 5 . 0 p p m
F F
F
U
F
F
F
F
F
U
F
F
F
T O
F
F
F
F
F
T O
F
F
,
,
1 . 0 0 A
5 . 0 0 V
,
2 4 . 0 C
S T A T U S
This menu enables the user to test system devices such as Pumps, Valves, MFC (Mass Flow Controller) etc.
installed and used in BioTector. In BioTector, when the user enters the Simulate menu, as the oxygen gas
flow will be required, the oxygen generator starts to operate automatically. The menu also shows the current
status of all devices when the BioTector is running. Note that the Simulate screen may change slightly
depending on system settings. Any settings made by the user in this menu are automatically reset when the
user exits this menu. The line below the time and date shows the MFC flow in l/h and actual CO 2 analyzer
reading in ppm.
Each time a component is activated, the BioTector will interlock additional devices to
ensure that the component being tested can be checked in a manner that will not
cause consequential damage to the overall system. It is recommended that each
test is evaluated carefully, for although the interlocks are extensive, it may still be
possible to damage the system.
In simulate menus, most items require a minimum of 6 l/h oxygen flow set on the
Mass Flow Controller (MFC) to operate. This is a system safety interlock, which is
implemented to prevent the system from flooding.
When ESCAPE key is used to return to the Diagnostics menu, BioTector carries out
an automatic pump synchronization process.
Page 85
1. MFC. Use this function to set the MFC (Mass Flow Controller) setpoint. Press the ENTER key, set the
required setpoint (e.g. 60 l/h), and press the ENTER key again. The actual flow is shown at the top of the
screen. An “*” is shown when the MFC has been activated. If the flow is 0.0 l/h, then the MFC is switched
off.
2. Ozone Generator. Use this function to test the Ozone Generator. To change the state of the device,
press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it
will be marked with an “*”. As a safety feature, when the Ozone Generator is switched on, a Pressure
Test procedure is executed automatically to detect any gas leakage in the system. If this test fails then
the Ozone Generator will not be switched on. See Section 8.1.1.1
Pressure Test and Section 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program for details on Pressure Test. When Ozone Generator activated, the
current drawn, which is ~1.00 Amp, is displayed. If the current drops below 0.5 Amp, BioTector generates
a “102_OZONE GEN FAULT” warning.
Ozone will be generated when the Ozone Generator is turned on.
WARNING
3. Ozone Generator Fan. This function displays the Ozone Generator Fan operation and voltage. When it is
ON, the voltage displayed is typically 2.5 Volts. If the voltage drops below 1.5 Volts, or exceeds 3.5 Volts
for longer than 5 seconds, BioTector generates a “103_OZONE FAN FAULT” warning.
4. Acid Pump. Use this function to test the Acid Pump. To turn the pump on, press the ENTER key, and
select ON. Press the ENTER key again, input the number of pulses, press the ENTER key and the pump
will run. When the pump is running the actual pulse time is displayed outside the brackets. The
programmed pulse time is displayed inside the brackets. The pump will stop when the required number of
pulses is complete, or to manually stop the pump, press ENTER, select OFF, and press ENTER again.
5. Base Pump. Use this function to test the Base Pump. To turn the pump on, press the ENTER key, and
select ON. Press the ENTER key again, input the number of pulses, press the ENTER key and the pump
will run. When the pump is running the actual pulse time is displayed outside the brackets. The
programmed pulse time is displayed inside the brackets. The pump will stop when the required number of
pulses is complete, or to manually stop the pump, press the ENTER key, select OFF, and press the
ENTER key again.
6. Sample Pump. Use this function to test the Sample Pump. The pump has four operating states: FWR
(forward), REV (Reverse), P-FWR (run under pulse control forward), P-REV (run under pulse control in
reverse). To run the pump in the required mode, press the ENTER key, and select that mode. If P-FWR
or P-REV is selected, enter the number of pulses (½ revolutions), press the ENTER key and the pump will
run. When the pump is running, the actual pulse time is displayed outside the brackets. The programmed
pulse time is displayed inside the brackets. The pump will stop when the required number of pulses is
complete, or to manually stop the pump, press the ENTER key, select OFF, and press the ENTER key
again.
When Acid, Base and/or Sample Pumps are activated, depending on the quantity of the liquid injected
into the reactor and due to an internal system interlock, the system may request the activation of Reactor
Purge cycle to purge any excess liquid from the reactor.
7. Reactor Motor. Use this function to test the Reactor Motor. To change the state of the device, press the
ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be
marked with an “*”.
Page 86
8. Sample Valve. Use this function to test the Sample Valve. To change the state of the device, press the
ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be
marked with an “*”.
9. Reactor Valve. Use this function to test the Reactor Valve. To change the state of the device, press the
ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be
marked with an “*”.
10. Exhaust Valve. Use this function to test the Exhaust Valve. To change the state of the device, press the
ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be
marked with an “*”.
11. Cleaning Valve (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Cleaning Valve. To change
the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key
again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.
12. Calibration Valve (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Zero and Span Calibration
Valves. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ZERO/SPAN/OFF,
and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.
13. Stream Valve. STREAM VALVE 1 is always programmed as default within the system software. Use this
function to test the other optional Stream Valves if installed and configured in the system. To test a
Stream Valve, press the ENTER key and select the number of the valve to be tested. Press the ENTER
key again and the valve will be activated. To turn the valve off, select OFF. These valves can be driven
either from programmable relays or from the Stream Expansion (Auxiliary) PCB. Note that only one
Stream Valve can be switched on at any given time.
14. Manual Valve (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Manual Valves. To test a
Manual Valve, press the ENTER key and select the number of the valve to be tested. Press the ENTER
key again and the valve will be activated. To turn the valve off, select OFF. Note that only one Manual
Valve can be switched on at any given time.
15. Cooler. The Cooler is normally automatically controlled by the system. To test the Cooler, press the
ENTER key and select device state option: ON, OFF, AUTO. When the device is on, it will be marked with
an “*”. The actual Cooler current, which is typically between 1.00 and 1.5 Amp, is displayed. If the current
drawn by the Cooler drops below 0.1 Amp, BioTector generates a “107_COOLER FAULT” warning.
16. Cooler Fan. This function displays the Cooler Fan operation and voltage. When it is ON, the voltage
displayed is typically 2.5 Volts. If the voltage drops below 1.5 Volts, or exceeds 3.5 Volts for longer than
5 seconds, BioTector generates a “108_COOLER FAN FAULT” warning.
17. System Fan. System Fan is normally automatically controlled by the BioTector. To test the System Fan,
press the ENTER key and select device state option: ON, OFF, AUTO. When the device is on, it will be
marked with an “*”.The actual BioTector temperature in degrees Celsius (°C) is also displayed in this
menu. In AUTO mode, if the temperature of the system is below the default set point temperature, which
is 25°C, BioTector switches the fan off in order to stabilize the temperature using its own internal heat. If
the temperature is above the set point temperature, fan keeps operating continuously.
18. Sampler Fill (if configured in the system). Signal to fill the BioTector sampler. To test the Sampler Fill
signal, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is
on, it will be marked with an “*”. This signal remains on until turned off.
19. Sampler Empty (if configured in the system). Signal to empty the BioTector sampler. This signal is a 5
second pulse. To test the Sampler Empty signal, press the ENTER key to set the device ON.
20. Sampler Error (if configured in the system). Signal sent from the BioTector sampler indicating that
there is an error in the sampler. To test the Sampler Error signal, press the ENTER key, set the device to
ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.
Page 87
21. Temp. Switch The Temperature Switch output is automatically controlled by the system depending on
the system temperature control setting (System Fan Control), which is programmed as 20°C by default.
To test the Temperature Switch, press the ENTER key and select device state option: ON, OFF, AUTO.
When the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. The current system temperature is also displayed.
22. Sample Sensor (if configured in the system). This device is input only and therefore its state cannot be
changed from this menu. It only indicates the state of the Sample Sensor.
23. Leak Detector (if configured in the system). This device is input only and therefore its state cannot be
changed from this menu. It only indicates the state of the BioTector Liquid Leak Detector alarm input.
24. Reactor Purge. This function purges the mixer reactor. When activated, system automatically displays
the Reactor Purge menu, which contains the relevant reactor purge parameters.
25. Run Reagent Purge. This function primes all reagents in the BioTector.
27. Input/Output Status. Input/Output Status is a link to Maintenance, Diagnostics, Input/Output Status
menu (see Section 8.1.5
Input/Output Status).
Page 88
8.1.3 Signal Simulate
S I G N A L
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
S I M U L A T E
1 < * C H A N N E L
5
A L A R M
1 8
C O 2
A L A R
1
S Y N C
R E L
2
S A M P L E
S
5
S A M P L E
F
8
C A L
S I G N
9
M A I N T
S I
0
R E M O T E
S
1
S T O P
▼
S I G N A L
S I M U
2 2
N O T E
2 3
W A R N I N G
2 4
F A U L T
2 5
M A N
M O D
2 6
4 - 2 0 m A
2 7
4 - 2 0 m A
3 0
4 - 2 0 m A
3 1
D W
F A I L
3 2
3 3
- - >
I / O
1
3
M
A
T
A
A
G
T
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
- 4
1 - 3
Y
A
U
L
N
A
T U S
1 - 3
L T
1 - 3
A L
N D B Y
L A T E
E
T R I G
C H N G
C H N G
1 - 3
R E A D
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
. 0 m A
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
S T A T U S
This menu enables the user to test the Fault relay, the available 4-20mA outputs, the programmed output
signals and if installed, the Stream Alarm relays and any other optional outputs in the BioTector. Any settings
made by the user in this menu are automatically reset when the user exits this menu.
1. - 4. Channel 1-4. This allows the user to test the function of each 4-20mA channel. Press the ENTER key,
use the arrow keys to set the required 4-20mA signal, and press the ENTER key again to test the 4-20mA
signal.
5. - 7. Alarm 1-3 (if configured in the system). This allows the user to test the function of the stream
specific alarms if they are programmed in Output Devices menu. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for
details. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press
the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.
8. - 10. CO2 Alarm 1-3 (if configured in the system). This allows the user to test the function of the stream
specific CO2 Alarms if they are programmed in Output Devices menu. See Section 8.3.5
Output
Devices for details. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF,
and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.
11. Sync Relay (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Synchronization Relay. To
change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER
key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
12. - 14. Sample Status 1-3 (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Sample Status
output signal for each specific stream. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the
device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See
Section 8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
15. - 17. Sample Fault 1-3 (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Sample Fault output
signal for each specific stream. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device
to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section
8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
Page 89
18. Cal Signal (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Calibration Signal output. To
change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER
key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
19. Maint Signal (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Maintenance Signal output. To
change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER
key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
20. Remote Standby (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Remote Standby output. To
change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER
key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
21. Stop (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Stop output. To change the state of the
device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is
on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
22. Note (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the system Notification output. To change
the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key
again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
23. Warning (if configured in the system). Use these functions to test the Warning output. To change the
state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If
the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
24. Fault (if configured in the system). Use this function to test the Fault output. To change the state of the
device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is
on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
25. Man Mode Trig (if configured in the system). Use this function to test system Manual Mode Trigger
output. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press
the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5
Output
Devices for details.
26. 4-20mA Chng (if configured in the system). Use this function to test system generic 4-20mA Change
output signal. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and
press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
27-29. 4-20mA Chng 1-3 (if configured in the system). Use this function to test system 4-20mA Change
output signal for stream specific channels from Channel 1 to Channel 3. To change the state of the
device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is
on, it will be marked with an “*”. See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
30. 4-20mA Read (if configured in the system). Use this function to test system 4-20mA Read output. To
change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to ON/OFF, and press the ENTER
key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.See Section 8.3.5 Output Devices for details.
31. DW Fail (if configured in the system). Use this function to test system DW FAIL (Drinking Water %
REMOVAL FAIL) output. To change the state of the device, press the ENTER key, set the device to
ON/OFF, and press the ENTER key again. If the device is on, it will be marked with an “*”.See Section
8.3.5
Output Devices for details.
33. Input/Output Status. Input/Output Status is a link to Maintenance, Diagnostics, Input/Output Status
menu (see Section 8.1.5
Input/Output Status for details).
Page 90
8.1.4 Data Output
D A T A
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
7
O U T P U T
O
S
S
S
S
U
E
E
E
E
T
N
N
N
N
P U T
D
D
R E A
D
F A U
D
C O N
D
A L L
- - >
D A T A
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
E
C
L
F
V
T
T
I
D
I C E
I O N
A R C H I V E
A R C H I V E
G U R A T I O N
A T A
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
M M C / S D
C A R D
P R O G R A M
This menu enables the user to select the communication port and to download the contents of the system
reaction, fault archives, system specific configuration and all data for diagnostics purposes.
1. Output Device. This item allows the user to select communication port configuration profile. Available
option is MMC/SD CARD. See Section 8.2.10
Data Program for specific output device settings.
2. Send Reaction Archive. Sub menu used to download the reaction archive to the selected output device.
3. Send Fault Archive. Sub menu used to download the fault archive to the selected output device.
4. Send Configuration. Sub menu used to download the system configuration to the selected output
device.
5. Send All Data. Sub menu used to download system all data, which includes system configuration, fault
archive, reaction archive and system diagnostics information.
7. Data Program. Data Program is a link to Maintenance, Commissioning, Data Program menu (see
Section 8.2.10
Data Program for details.
When external MMC/SD memory card is used as the output device, the data is downloaded into the card in
text format. Note that;
• Any text data (reaction and fault archive, configuration and all data) can be downloaded into the card
while BioTector is running.
• The card can be removed when BioTector is running.
• The card should not be removed before the data transfer is completed.
• If the data download into the card is successful, the files, which can be accessed in the memory card
in text format, are reaction archive, fault archive, configuration and/or all data.
• Other files which are located in the in system’s external memory card by default are system firmware
(sysfrmw.hex) and system configuration (syscnfg.bin) both of which are in binary formats. Binary files
can only be opened and viewed by specific computer programs. Therefore the user should not
attempt to open or access these files.
• The memory card used in BioTector can be an MMC/SD card formatted with FAT, FAT12/16 or
FAT32 file systems. Most SDHC cards are also supported and can also be used.
Page 91
8.1.4.1
Send Reaction Archive
S E N D
1 <
2
3
4
5
*
R E A C T I O N
S
N
S
P
S
T
U
T
A
T
A
M
A
U
O
R
B
R
S
P
T
D A
E R
O
T
S E
E
S E
S E N
O U T P U T
T
F
N
N
D
A R C H I V E
E
E
D I
D I
I N
# 1 2 3
V E N T S
N G
N G
G
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
0 1 - 0 9 - 0 2
1 2 3
I T E M S
This menu is used to download the reaction archive. The communication port parameters used are those set
up in the Data Program menu.
1. Start Date. This is the start date of the first item to be downloaded. The default date is the current date on
the BioTector, which can be changed by the user. The newest event is downloaded first when
downloading data.
2. Number of Events. This is the number of events to be downloaded. The default is the number of events
in the reaction archive, which can be edited by the user.
3. Start Sending. Press the ENTER key to start downloading the data.
4. Pause Sending. Press the ENTER key to interrupt the downloading of data. Press again to continue
downloading. If the downloading is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, then the downloading is
automatically resumed.
5. Stop Sending. Press the ENTER key to stop downloading the data.
OUTPUT ITEMS is the number of events currently downloaded. The maximum amount of events is 9999.
When external MMC/SD memory card is being used as the output device, the reaction archive will be saved
into the card in text format and named as “RARCH.TXT” by default.
Page 92
The meaning of the abbreviations used in the downloaded analysis data in both standard and engineering
modes (see Print Mode in Section 8.2.10
Data Program for details) are as follows:
Standard mode:
TIC & TOC Analysis:
TIME
The time the reaction started.
DATE
The date the reaction started.
S1:2
Reaction type and range.
TICmgC/l
The calibrated TIC value in mgC/l.
TOCmgC/l
The calibrated TOC value in mgC/l (TOC represents NPOC).
COD/BODmgO/l The calculated COD and/or BOD value in mgO/l (if activated in COD/BOD Program menu).
REMOVAL [%] Drinking Water REMOVAL value in % (if activated in DW Program menu).
RESULT
Drinking Water RESULT in FAIL/PASS condition (if activated in DW Program menu).
TC Analysis:
TIME
DATE
S1:2
TCmgC/l
…
The time the reaction started.
The date the reaction started.
Reaction type and range.
The calibrated TC value in mgC/l (TC represents TIC + NPOC + POC).
VOC Analysis:
TIME
DATE
S1:2
TCmgC/l
TICmgC/l
TOCmgC/l
VOCmgC/l
…
The time the reaction started.
The date the reaction started.
Reaction type and range.
The calibrated TC value in mgC/l (TC represents TIC + NPOC + POC).
The calibrated TIC value in mgC/l.
The calculated TOC value in mgC/l (TOC is calculated as TC – TIC).
The calculated VOC value in mgC/l (VOC is calculated as TC – TIC – NPOC).
Engineering mode (TIC & TOC Analysis):
TIME
DATE
S1:2
CO2z
TICmgu
TICmgc
CO2p
TOCmgu
TOCmgc
CO2p
COD/BODmgc
REMOVAL [%]
RESULT
BT_DegC
MB_DegC
Atm
SAMPLE
SMPL PUMP
ACID PUMP
BASE PUMP
COOLER
O3 HEATER
The time the reaction started.
The date the reaction started.
Reaction type and range.
CO2 analyzer zero adjust for the current reaction.
The un-calibrated TIC value in mgC/l.
The calibrated TIC value in mgC/l.
The height of the TIC CO2 peak.
The un-calibrated TOC value in mgC/l.
The calibrated TOC value in mgC/l (TOC represents NPOC).
The height of the TOC CO2 peak.
The calculated COD and/or BOD value in mgO/l (if activated in COD/BOD Program menu).
Drinking Water REMOVAL value in % (if activated in DW Program menu).
Drinking Water RESULT in FAIL/PASS condition (if activated in DW Program menu).
BioTector temperature in Degrees Celsius (°C).
Motherboard temperature in Degrees Celsius (°C).
Atmospheric pressure in kPa.
Sample quality (%) from Sample Sensor signal, which is used to activate SAMPLE STATUS output.
The five items, which are number coded or a number data, gives information on the Sample Pump:
1) operation mode (0=time mode or 1= pulse mode),
2) number of pulses during operation such as injection,
3) total time (milliseconds) taken for total number of pulse operation (see point 2 above),
4) the time (milliseconds) taken for the last pulse operation (see point 2 above),
5) error counter (ranges from 0 to 6). When a pulse is missed or not detected, the pump switches into
time mode for that specific operation (for instance, injection, synchronization, etc). System only
generates a pump warning and logs into fault archive if there are 6 consecutive failures.
Similar information on Acid Pump operation (see items 2, 3 and 4 only, listed for SMPL PUMP above).
Similar information on Base Pump operation (see items 2, 3 and 4 only, listed for SMPL PUMP above).
The status of the Cooler. When the Cooler is off, “OFF” is printed in the reaction archive data.
The status of the Ozone Destructor Heater. When the heater is off, “OFF” is printed in the data.
Note that the COD and/or BOD result is added into the reaction screens and reaction archives if the COD
and/or BOD is activated in COD/BOD Program menu.
Page 93
Engineering mode (VOC Analysis):
TIME
DATE
S1:2
CO2z
The time the reaction started.
The date the reaction started.
Reaction type and range.
CO2 analyzer zero adjust for the current reaction.
TCmgu
TCmgc
CO2p
The un-calibrated TC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TC analysis).
The calibrated TC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TC analysis).
The height of the TC CO2 peak.
TICmgu
TICmgc
CO2p
The un-calibrated TIC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TIC&TOC analysis).
The calibrated TIC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TIC&TOC analysis).
The height of the TIC CO2 peak.
NPOCmgu
NPOCmgc
CO2p
The un-calibrated NPOC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TIC&TOC analysis).
The calibrated NPOC value in mgC/l (measured value from the TIC&TOC analysis).
The height of the NPOC CO2 peak.
TOCmgc
VOCmgc
The calculated TOC value in mgC/l (TOCmgc is calculated as TCmgc – TICmgc).
The calculated VOC value in mgC/l (VOCmgc is calculated as TCmgc – TICmgc – NPOCmgc).
COD/BODmgc
REMOVAL [%]
RESULT
BT_DegC
MB_DegC
Atm
SAMPLE
SMPL PUMP
The calculated COD or BOD value in mgO/l (if activated in COD/BOD Program menu).
Drinking Water REMOVAL value in % (if activated in DW Program menu).
Drinking Water RESULT in FAIL/PASS condition (if activated in DW Program menu).
BioTector temperature in Degrees Celsius (°C).
Motherboard temperature in Degrees Celsius (°C).
Atmospheric pressure in kPa.
Sample quality (%) from Sample Sensor signal, which is used to activate SAMPLE STATUS output.
The five items, which are number coded or a number data, gives information on the Sample Pump:
1) operation mode (0=time mode or 1= pulse mode),
2) number of pulses during operation such as injection,
3) total time (milliseconds) taken for total number of pulse operation (see point 2 above),
4) the time (milliseconds) taken for the last pulse operation (see point 2 above),
5) error counter (ranges from 0 to 6). When a pulse is missed or not detected, the pump switches into
time mode for that specific operation (for instance, injection, synchronization, etc). System only
generates a pump warning and logs into fault archive if there are 6 consecutive failures.
Similar information on Acid Pump operation (see items 2, 3 and 4 only, listed for SMPL PUMP above).
Similar information on Base Pump operation (see items 2, 3 and 4 only, listed for SMPL PUMP above).
The status of the Cooler. When the Cooler is off, “OFF” is printed in the reaction archive data.
The status of the Ozone Destructor Heater. When the heater is off, “OFF” is printed in the data.
ACID PUMP
BASE PUMP
COOLER
O3 HEATER
Note that the COD or BOD result is added into the reaction screens and reaction archives if the COD or BOD
is activated in COD/BOD Program menu.
Page 94
8.1.4.2
Send Fault Archive
This menu is used to download the fault archive. The communication port parameters used are those set up
in the Data Program menu. All items in the fault archive will be downloaded unless the user interrupts the
downloading with the Pause Sending or Stop Sending functions.
1. Start Sending. Press the ENTER key to start downloading the data.
2. Pause Sending. Press the ENTER key to interrupt the downloading of data. Press again to continue
downloading. If the downloading is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, then the downloading is
automatically resumed.
3. Stop Sending. Press the ENTER key to stop downloading the data.
OUTPUT ITEMS is the number of events currently downloaded. The maximum number of events in the fault
archive is 99.
When external MMC/SD flash memory card is being used as the output device, the fault archive will be saved
into the card in text format and named as “FARCH.TXT” by default.
8.1.4.3
Send Configuration
This menu is used to download the configuration data in the BioTector. The communication port parameters
used are those set up in the Data Program menu. All the configuration data will be downloaded unless the
user interrupts the downloading with the Pause Sending or Stop Sending functions.
1. Start Sending. Press the ENTER key to start downloading the data.
2. Pause Sending. Press the ENTER key to interrupt the downloading of data. Press again to continue
downloading.
Note: If the downloading is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, then the downloading is automatically
resumed.
3. Stop Sending. Press the ENTER key to stop downloading the data.
OUTPUT ITEMS is the number of events currently downloaded.
When external MMC/SD flash memory card is being used as the output device, the system configuration will
be saved into the card in text format and named as “CNFG.TXT” by default.
8.1.4.4
Send All Data
This menu is used to download all data (i.e. Reaction Archive, Fault Archive, Configuration and System
Diagnostics) in one simple operation. The communication port parameters used are those set up in the Data
Program menu. All the diagnostic data will be downloaded unless the user interrupts the downloading with the
Pause Sending or Stop Sending functions.
Unlike individual data download (e.g. reaction archive, fault archive and configuration), which are downloaded
in the selected system language, all data is downloaded in English language only.
1. Start Sending. Press the ENTER key to start downloading the data.
2. Pause Sending. Press the ENTER key to interrupt the downloading of data. Press again to continue
downloading. If the downloading is interrupted for more than 60 seconds, then the downloading is
automatically resumed.
3. Stop Sending. Press the ENTER key to stop downloading the data.
OUTPUT ITEMS is the number of events currently downloaded.
When external MMC/SD flash memory card is being used as the output device, the all data will be saved into
the card in text format and named as “ALLDAT.TXT” by default.
Page 95
8.1.5 Input/Output Status
Input/Output Status menus are used for monitoring the analog and digital inputs and outputs for advanced
diagnostics purposes.
Digital Input
The Digital Input menu allows the engineer to monitor the system digital inputs. This feature is useful for the
system trouble-shooting or diagnostics. On the screen the digital inputs are organized in columns and rows
with their code, logical states and function. Each input name is composed of the “DI” prefix and two-decimal
index, which identifies the input. For example, the digital input named “DI06” is digital input 6, which is the
ENTER key. Its logical state is shown as 0, therefore the ENTER key is not pressed or activated. When
ENTER key is pressed, its logical state will be shown as 1.
In the idle or open circuit state, all the system digital inputs are set to logical state 0. The active or closed
circuit state is logical state 1. The programmable digital inputs are marked as [PROGRAMMABLE] in this
menu.
Digital Output
The Digital Output menu allows the engineer to monitor the system digital outputs. This feature is useful for
the system trouble-shooting or diagnostics. On the screen the digital outputs are organized in columns and
rows with their code, logical states and function. Each output name is composed of the “DO” prefix and twodecimal index, which identifies the output. For instance, the digital output named “DO34” is digital output 34,
which is used to control the heater of the Ozone Destructor. Its logical state is shown as 0 and 1, which
stands for OFF and ON respectively. Upon system power up or reset, all system digital outputs are set to
logical state 0.
Analog Input
The Analog Input menu allows the user to monitor the system analog inputs. This feature is useful for the
system trouble-shooting or diagnostics. On the screen the analog inputs are organized in columns and rows.
Each analog input has three parameters. The first is ADC converter digital value, the second is the input
voltage measured in volts and the third is the function. The BioTector uses a 12-bit ADC, therefore the range
of the digitized inputs are 0-4095. The voltage range is 0 to 5.00 Volts.
Analog Output
The Analog Output menu allows the user to monitor the system analog outputs. This feature is useful for the
system trouble-shooting or diagnostics. On the screen, each analog output has three parameters. The first is
DAC converter digital value, the second is output voltage measured in volts and the third is the function. The
BioTector uses a 12-bit DAC, therefore the range of the digitized outputs are 0-4095. The voltage range is 0
to 10.00 Volts.
Page 96
8.1.6 Oxygen Controller Status
O 2 - C T R L
1 <
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
I
V
M
T
A
O
V
R
R
M
M
D
E
O
E
I
2
A
O
O
F
F
E
R
D
M
R
L
T
T
C
C
S T A T U S
N T I F
S I O N
E
P E R A
P R E
P R E S
V E
1
A R Y
A R Y
S E T
F L O
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
I C A T I O N
T
S
S
,
V
V
P
W
U R E
S
S
S E
2 , 3
A L V
A L V
O I N
S E N S O R
E N S O R
N S O R
E
E
T
S E N S O R
# c 3 0
0 1 . 0
M F C /
2 5 .
1 5 0 0
4 0 0
1
,
F O R W
0
2 0 .
1 9 .
0
0
O
0
m
m
0
A
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
0 0 1 9
2
C
b a r
b a r
,
R D
,
,
,
0
0 l / h
9 l / h ,
1 . 2 4 V
4 . 4 5 V
2 . 2 4 V
1 . 7 8 V
The O2-CTRL STATUS (Oxygen Controller Status) menu displays the system air supply, oxygen supply, gas
flow, pressure and temperature related parameters. In BioTector, when the user enters the Oxygen Controller
Status menu or any menu, where the oxygen gas flow will be required, the oxygen concentrator starts to
operate automatically.
1. Identification. Identification is the specific identification number for the Oxygen Controller Board.
2. Version. This menu item specifies the software version of the Oxygen Controller Board.
3. Mode. This menu item allows the Oxygen Controller Board to operate the Mass Flow Controller (MFC)
only, the Oxygen Concentrator only, or both.
4. Temperature Sensor. This is the BioTector temperature sensor, located on the Oxygen Controller Board,
which displays the system temperature. The voltage (V) readings as obtained from the temperature
sensor are displayed in real time.
5. Air Pressure Sensor. This menu item displays the air inlet pressure for the oxygen concentrator. The
pressure (mbar) and the voltage (V) readings as obtained from the Air Pressure Sensor are displayed in
real time.
6. O2 Pressure Sensor. This menu item displays the oxygen inlet pressure for the Mass Flow Controller.
The pressure (mbar) and the voltage (V) readings as obtained from the Oxygen Pressure Sensor are
displayed in real time.
7. Valve 1, 2, 3. This item displays the Oxygen Controller valve outputs for valves 1, 2 and 3. Valve 1 is the
Air Isolation Valve. See figure 6 in Section 4.2.3
BioTector Oxygen Concentrator for details. Valve 2
and 3 are reserved. When Valve 1 is activated, the displayed value is “1”. When Valve 1 is deactivated,
the displayed value is “0”.
8. Rotary Valve. This menu item displays the operation (Forward, Reverse and Stop) of the Rotary Valve.
9. Rotary Valve Sensor. This menu item shows the sensor position of the Rotary Valve. If the Rotary Valve
is on the sensor, the displayed value is “1”. If the valve is not on the sensor, the displayed value is “0”.
10. MFC Setpoint. This menu item allows the user to test the Mass Flow Controller. Use this function to set
the MFC setpoint. Press the ENTER key, set the required setpoint (e.g. 60 l/h), and press the ENTER key
again. The actual flow is shown at the top of the screen. An “*” is shown when the MFC has been
activated. If the flow is 0.0 l/h, then the MFC is switched off.
11. MFC Flow. When MFC Setpoint is programmed above, this menu item displays the actual flow and the
corresponding voltage on the MFC. When BioTector is not running, that is, when it is powered up and
stopped, or when it is in standby state, as the MFC Setpoint is 1 l/h, the MFC Flow displays the 1 l/h flow.
Page 97
8.1.7 Service
S E R V I C E
1 <
2
3
4
5
R
S
R
S
R
E
E
E
E
E
A
R
S
T
S
0 9 : 1 7 : 2 8
C T I O
V I C E
E T
S
S E R
E T
S
N
R
E R
V I
E R
C
E
V
C
V
O
Q
I
E
I
U N T E
U I R E
C E
C
Z E R
C E
Z
R
D
I N
O U N T E R
O
E R O
1 2 - 0 9 - 0 2
5 2 3 8
1 7 8
D A Y S
2 0
,
5
The Service menu displays the system service information. It is also used to reset the service counter and
activate zero calibration cycles after the service is carried out.
1. Reaction Counter. This is the number of reactions performed by the BioTector.
2. Service Required In. This menu item specifies the number of days left before service is required. Note
that the factory setting for this counter is typical for normal site conditions, and the service interval may
have to be adjusted depending on site conditions. See Section 8.3.8 Fault Setup for details. When the
BioTector is powered up, the number of days counter of the Service Required In function keeps operating
regardless of the system is running or stopped.
3. Reset Service Counter. This menu item allows the user reset the service counter after the service has
been completed.
4. Set Service Zero. During the service of some critical component parts in the BioTector (e.g. Sample
Pump), there is a possibility for contamination of such components and this may create an unacceptable
TOC offset (particularly in low range analyzers). Zero calibration may therefore be required after the
BioTector removes contamination as it operates. If this occurs the zero calibration can be automatically
initiated using the “Set Service Zero” function. When initiated, BioTector automatically runs a total of 5
zero calibration cycles during the following 100 online measurements (default values) and automatically
adjusts the zero offset values to compensate for the removal of the contamination. It will therefore not be
necessary to revisit the BioTector after the service or to repeat the zero calibration cycle.
“Set Service Zero” function can be activated while the BioTector is running or stopped. An asterisk “*”
mark is displayed to indicate that this function is activated. If the BioTector is stopped, the service zero
calibration cycle begins when the system is started. BioTector returns online operation when the service
zero calibration cycle is completed. In the example Service menu displayed above, the first number entry
“20” displays the number of online reactions, which will be carried out before each service zero calibration
cycle. The second number entry “5” displays the total number of zero calibration cycles.
Depending on system settings, BioTector either takes DI Water as a sample or does not take any sample
during the Zero Calibration cycle. See ZERO WATER in section 8.3.4.2
Zero Program for details. If
DI Water is used during the Zero Calibration cycles, it is important that Zero Water (DI Water) is
connected to BioTector’s Zero Water port or Manual/Calibration port (if these ports are not available,
connect DI Water to Sample 1 port) before the “Set Service Zero” is activated. Typically, less than 4 liters
of DI Water is sufficient to complete the Zero Calibration cycles during Service Zero.
5. Reset Service Zero. This menu item allows the user to deactivate or to stop the service zero calibration
cycle (see Set Service Zero function above). When the Reset Service Zero function is selected, the
asterisk “*” mark, which indicates the activation of Set Service Zero function, is removed. If Reset Service
Zero function is selected during one of the zero calibration cycles, BioTector returns online operation after
completing the current zero calibration cycle.
Page 98
8.2
COMMISSIONING MENU
The Commissioning menus are used during the commissioning and startup of the analyzer. The functions in
the menus are used to program system site specific settings.
Commissioning Menu Diagram
8.2.1 Reaction Time
REACTION TIME
6m09s
INTERVAL
0m
TOTAL
6m09s
▪ REACTION TIME displays the total reaction time (in minutes and
seconds) for range 1, based on all programmed settings in
System Program, System Program 1 menu.
▪ INTERVAL is the time (0 minutes by default) added between
each reaction. Interval can be programmed on site if frequent
analysis is not necessary. The longest interval time, which can
be programmed, is 1440 minutes (or 1 day). A programmed
interval time would reduce the reagent usage significantly.
▪ When BioTector automatically extends the reaction time due to
high level of TIC and/or TOC in the sample, if any INTERVAL
time is programmed, the extended reaction time is taken out
from the interval time.
▪ BioTector automatically generates an INTERVAL time when the
user programs any SAMPLER, FORWARD and/or REVERSE
times, which exceeds the maximum allowable time in the
Sample Pump menu below. The system determines the
maximum allowable time from the System Program 1 settings in
System Program menu.
▪ TOTAL displays the total reaction time including the interval time
if programmed.
Page 99
8.2.2 Sample Pump
SAMPLER FORWARD REVERSE
STREAM 1
100s
60s
75s
STREAM 2
100s
60s
75s
STREAM 3
45s
60s
……………………
MANUAL 1
50s
0s
MANUAL 2
MANUAL 3
……………………
CALIBRATION
50s
▪ BioTector Sample Pump runs forward for the FORWARD time to
bring a fresh sample from the STREAM, MANUAL and/or
CALIBRATION points to the analyzer. This time should be long
enough to guarantee a fresh sample is injected into the reactor
and any old samples and bubbles are completely removed from
the sample lines.
▪ BioTector Sample Pump runs in reverse for the REVERSE time
so as to wash and empty the sample lines prior to the next
reaction. The recommended time for REVERSE is approximately
FORWARD time plus 15 seconds. See Section 8.1.1.4 Sample
Pump Test to test Sample Pump operation times.
▪ The REVERSE time for a Manual Valve can only be activated if
an optional Manual Bypass Valve is installed in the system.
Manual Bypass Valve is used to return the previous sample into
drain.
▪ If a Sampler is programmed in Stream Program menu, system
automatically shows the Sampler time in this menu. The sampler
time should also be long enough to guarantee that the sampler
chamber is filled with fresh sample.
▪ When the user programs any SAMPLER, FORWARD and/or
REVERSE times, which exceeds the maximum allowable time,
BioTector generates the required INTERVAL time automatically
in the Reaction Time menu above. The maximum allowable time
is determined by the system from the System Program 1 settings
in System Program menu.
8.2.3 Stream Program
SAMPLER
CONTROL
NO
BIOTECTOR
START-UP RANGE
1
RANGE LOCKED
NO
PROGRAMMED STREAMS
3
▪ If a sampler is used with the BioTector, SAMPLER is
programmed (YES). When activated in this menu, the
programmable Sampler time will be displayed automatically in
the Sample Pump menu above.
▪ In multi-stream systems, CONTROL determines the multi-stream
valve sequence to be controlled by either BIOTECTOR, or by an
EXTERNAL device, or by external STREAM INPUT signals.
▪ If the CONTROL is programmed as EXTERNAL, then both multistream valve sequence and operation ranges have to be
controlled by an external device.
▪ If the CONTROL is programmed as STREAM INPUT, then the
multi-stream valve sequence is controlled automatically by the
Stream Input signals sent from an external device.
▪ START-UP RANGE (1 by default) defines the range BioTector
will use at the first reaction it starts up with. In multi-stream
systems, if none of the RANGE setting for stream sequence
below is programmed as AUTO, this function is automatically
hidden by the system.
▪ If RANGE LOCKED (NO by default) is programmed as YES,
BioTector locks the operation range at the defined RANGE
above. In other words, the automatic range change function is
disabled with the YES setting.
▪ In multi-stream systems, if none of the RANGE setting for
stream sequence below is programmed as AUTO, this function
is automatically hidden by the system.
▪ PROGRAMMED STREAMS displays the number of streams
installed and programmed in Output Devices menu.
Page 100
VOC CYCLE
1
TC CHECK STM 1
TC CHECK STM 2
TC CHECK STM 3
STREAM
STREAM
STREAM
STREAM
………………
1 , 2
2 , 1
3 , 4
- , ……………
10% 5.000mgC/l
10% 5.000mgC/l
10% 5.000mgC/l
RANGE
RANGE
RANGE
RANGE
……………
3
3
3
…
▪ VOC CYCLE determines the frequency of the TC analysis cycles
and the TC TIC & NPOC analysis cycles BioTector carries out
depending on the TC CHECK STREAM 1-3 concentration
settings below. In other words, the TIC & NPOC analysis is
carried out on a scheduled basis depending on the programmed
TC CHECK STREAM 1-3 concentration levels.
▪ When the VOC CYCLE setting is 1, BioTector carries out TC TIC
& NPOC analysis continuously. When the VOC CYCLE setting is
for instance 10, BioTector carries out one TC TIC & NPOC
analysis followed by nine TC analyses.
▪ If any of the measured TC result is outside the TC CHECK
STREAM 1-3 concentration levels programmed in both % and
mgC/l below, BioTector starts to carry out TC TIC & NPOC
analysis as soon as the current stream program analysis
sequence is complete.
▪ VOC CYCLE and TC CHECK STREAM 1-3 functions are
displayed in systems operating with the VOC analysis mode.
▪ When the VOC CYCLE described above is programmed to take
place at a frequency greater than 1, BioTector starts to carry out
TC TIC & NPOC analysis cycle for the relevant stream, if the TC
result is outside the programmed % and mgC/l bands. If the TC
result is within the programmed bands, the BioTector returns to
the routine TC analysis as scheduled.
▪ The BioTector operation with the programmable VOC CYCLE,
and the ability of the system to automatically carry out TC TIC &
NPOC analysis at a variable frequency, based on the
programmable TC CHECK STREAM 1-3 concentration bands,
allows the measurement of multiple parameters of the sample
without a significant impact on the overall analysis cycle time.
▪ If the CONTROL is programmed as BIOTECTOR, the multistream valve sequence operates according to the STREAM and
RANGE settings defined in this menu.
▪ In STREAM 1 , 2 setting, the first setting “1” represents the multistream valve number (e.g. Stream Valve 1), and the second
setting “2” represents the number of reactions to be carried out
at this stream before switching to the next stream.
▪ RANGE defines the operation range for each stream. In a multistream system, the ranges are locked to Range 3 by default in
the factory. It is recommended to lock each stream to a
particular range (e.g. 1, 2 or 3), which is appropriate to the
concentration levels of the sample, in multi-stream systems.
▪ When a specific stream is programmed as “- , - - -, RANGE -“,
the analysis on that stream does not take place.
▪ The AUTO (AUTOMATIC) range change function is disabled in
multi-stream systems by default. If it is necessary to run any of
the streams with AUTO range change function, please contact
your local distributor or the manufacturer. When AUTO range
change function is used, a minimum of five analysis reactions is
recommended as BioTector needs to find the optimum operation
range automatically. Therefore, depending on the system
response, it may be necessary to discard the first two or three
analysis results, when the AUTO range change function is
selected for a specific stream.
Page 101
8.2.4 COD/BOD/DW Program
DISPLAY
NO
COD/BOD PROGRAM
STREAM 1
TOC FACTOR
STREAM 2
TOC FACTOR
STREAM 3
TOC FACTOR
……………………
STREAM 6
TOC FACTOR
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
………
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
DW PROGRAM
DETENTION TIME
TOC <
2.0mgC/l
TOC <
4.0mgC/l
TOC <
8.0mgC/l
TOC >
8.0mgC/l
32m
0%
35%
45%
50%
……
0.0
▪ DISPLAY function, which is programmed as “NO” by default,
allows the user to program COD and BOD results, and DW
“Drinking Water” parameters (which are % REMOVAL and
PASS/FAIL RESULT). When DISPLAY is programmed as
“YES”, the system displays the relevant parameters on screen.
When activated, the system sends the relevant 4-20mA signals
for COD and BOD (in mgO/l), and for REMOVAL (in %), to the
relevant result output channels if programmed. See Section
8.2.8 4-20mA Program for details.
▪ In Stream 1 1.0 0.0 setting , the first setting “1.0” acts as the
“OVERALL FACTOR” and the second setting acts as the
“OFFSET FACTOR” in the following equation:
COD (and/or BOD) = [Overall Factor * (TOC Factor * TOC)] +
Offset Factor
▪ In TC analysis mode, instead of the TOC FACTOR, the TC
FACTOR is displayed in this menu and used in above equation.
▪ If the DISPLAY is programmed as COD and/or BOD above, the
system multiplies the TOC result of the corresponding stream
(STREAM 1-3) with the TOC FACTOR and with the OVERALL
FACTOR and adds the OFFSET FACTOR to calculate the COD
and/or BOD value.
▪ The STREAM FACTOR for each stream is obtained following
the procedures described in information sheet “I030. TOC to
COD or BOD Correlation Method”, which is available in the
MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector.
▪ Stream 1 factor is used for manual samples and calibration
standards.
▪ When the display of the DW “Drinking Water” parameter is
activated with the DISPLAY function above, BioTector calculates
the % REMOVAL values using the measured TOC results on
STREAM 1 (SAMPLE 1) and STREAM 2 (SAMPLE 2), which
must be installed and connected to the INLET and OUTLET
streams respectively.
▪ DETENTION TIME is a site specific time interval, during which
the water flows through the water treatment plant or a treatment
system to achieve a certain level of organic removal (in %) from
the inlet stream (STREAM 1). This time must be programmed on
site depending on site specific process conditions and
requirements. BioTector uses this time to synchronize the inlet
and outlet TOC measurements for the calculation of %
REMOVAL.
▪ The % REMOVAL (organic removal) value is calculated as
follows:
REMOVAL (%) = { [ (STREAM 1 TOC Result) – (STREAM 2
TOC RESULT) ] / (STREAM 1 TOC Result) } * 100
Note that STREAM 2 (OUTLET) TOC result in above equation,
is the STREAM 2 result, which is evaluated by the system after
the completion of the DETENTION TIME described above.
▪ When DW display is activated, the % REMOVAL values are
displayed on the Analysis Data Screen and also in the reaction
archive menus.
▪ TOC < (LESS THAN) XmgC/l and X% values define various
concentration levels at which a certain % REMOVAL must be
achieved for a PASS or a FAIL condition. When the TOC result
is measured for the INLET stream (STREAM 1), BioTector
evaluates the TOC result for the OUTLET stream (STREAM 2),
which is available at the end of the DETENTION TIME, and
based on the measured concentration levels, the % REMOVAL
value is calculated.
Page 102
▪ If the calculated % REMOVAL value is less than the
corresponding expected % level programmed in this menu,
BioTector displays FAIL as the RESULT on the Analysis Data
Screen and records into the reaction archives. If the calculated
% REMOVAL value is greater than the corresponding expected
% level programmed in this menu, BioTector displays PASS as
the RESULT on the Analysis Data Screen and records into the
reaction archives.
▪ For example, when the TOC result of the inlet stream (STREAM
1) is 3.4mgC/l at a given time during online operation, this result
falls into the “TOC < 4.0mgC/l 35%” category in this menu. If
the outlet stream (STREAM 2) result available after the
completion of the Detention Time, which is 32 minutes in this
example menu, is 2.1mgC/l, the % REMOVAL value is 38.2%.
As the 38.2% is greater than the defined 35% at this category,
this is a PASS condition, because the defined minimum %
organic removal from the inlet stream is achieved. If the outlet
stream (STREAM 2) result is 2.8mgC/l, the % REMOVAL value
is 17.6%. As the 17.6% is less than the defined 35% at this
category, this is a FAIL condition, because the defined minimum
% organic removal from the inlet stream is not achieved. In other
words, in this example and programmed category, the TOC
result of the outlet stream (STREAM 2) available at the end of
the Detention Time, must be less than 2.21mgC/l for a PASS
condition.
▪ When one of the Programmable Outputs is programmed as “DW
FAIL” in Output Devices Programmable Outputs menu (see
section 8.3.5.2 Programmable Outputs for details), and if the %
REMOVAL is a FAIL condition as described above, the relevant
relay output signal is activated. When the % REMOVAL
becomes a PASS condition, the output signal is deactivated.
▪ The DISPLAY function of the DW Program menu is operational
in the TIC&TOC analysis type. When the ANALYSIS TYPE is
changed to TC or VOC (see section 8.3.1
Analysis Mode for
details), the display of the DW “Drinking Water” parameters are
automatically disabled by the BioTector.
8.2.5 New Reagents Program
SPAN CALIBRATION
NO
SPAN CHECK
NO
AUTOMATIC RE-START
YES
▪ SPAN CALIBRATION (NO by default) defines if the Span
Calibration reactions are part of the Install New Reagents
procedure in Reagents Setup menu.
▪ If SPAN CALIBRATION is activated (YES), the standard solution
needs to be connected to the Calibration/Manual port of the
BioTector as part of the Install New Reagents procedure. See
concentrations of the TOC STANDARD defined in Span
Calibration menu (see Section 2.3.2
Span Calibration
for details).
▪ SPAN CHECK (NO by default) defines if the Span Check
reactions are part of the Install New Reagents procedure in
Reagents Setup menu.
▪ Note that both SPAN CALIBRATION and SPAN CHECK
functions cannot be selected as YES simultaneously and cannot
occur together in the Install New Reagents procedure.
▪ AUTOMATIC RE-START (Yes by default) defines BioTector to
return automatically online operation having completed the
Install New Reagents cycle.
Page 103
8.2.6 Reagents Monitor
REAGENTS MONITOR
YES
LOW REAGENTS
NOTE
LOW REAGENTS AT
20 DAYS
NO REAGENTS
WARNING
ACID VOLUME
19.0l ~239 DAYS
BASE VOLUME
19.0l ~239 DAYS
▪ When REAGENTS MONITOR is activated (YES by default), the
system creates a new Reagent Status screen which displays the
amount of reagents and the estimated number of days left for
each reagent to last. The Reagent Status screen is displayed for
a period of 15 minutes and the system automatically reverts
back to the default Reaction Result screen.
▪ BioTector calculates the reagent usage and the days remaining
based on the average reagent usage from the reaction archive.
If there are no reactions available in the archive, BioTector
calculates the reagent usage using the operation range
information in the system program menus and updates the
reagent status figures accordingly.
▪ Note that when one or more reagent volumes are updated in this
menu, system automatically resets the new reagents volumes in
Install New Reagents menu and also updates the figures
displayed in the main Reagents Status screen.
▪ LOW REAGENTS, which is programmed as NOTE (notification)
by default, will activate a relay specifically programmed for
notification events.
▪ When LOW REAGENTS is programmed as WARNING, and if
reagents run low, system generates an “85_LOW REAGENTS”
warning and activates a relay specifically programmed for
warning events.
▪ LOW REAGENTS AT specifies the number of days (20 days by
default), before the system generates an “85_LOW REAGENTS”
warning or notification, depending on the LOW REAGENT
setting above.
▪ This function can be used by the user as an early warning or
notification of system low reagents so that the required reagents
can be prepared or ordered in time.
▪ NO REAGENTS programmed as a WARNING event by default,
can also be set as a FAULT event. When system calculates no
reagents, the fault relay is activated and system generates a
“20_NO REAGENTS” fault or warning.
▪ NO REAGENTS can also be programmed as NOTE
(notification) where only a relay programmed as notification
operates in the event of no reagents.
▪ ACID VOLUME allows the user to enter the volume of the acid
reagent. When the volume is programmed, system automatically
calculates the number of days acid reagent will last.
▪ BASE VOLUME allows the user to enter the volume of the base
reagent. When the volume is programmed, system automatically
calculates the number of days base reagent will last.
▪ It is strongly recommended that each time acid and/or base
reagents are replaced or topped up, a Zero Calibration cycle is
activated using the Start New Reagent Cycle function in Install
New Reagents menu or using the Run Zero Calibration function
in Zero Calibration menu.
Page 104
8.2.7 Autocal Program
TIME
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
00:00
S
Z
ZS
-----
CHECK
CAL
CAL
-----
▪ TIME (00:00 by default) schedules the Zero & Span Calibration
or Check reactions time (in HR:MIN) for the weekdays if any is
programmed below.
▪ In this menu, Zero and/or Span Calibration reactions and/or
Check reactions are scheduled if programmed on a particular
day of the week. Note that by default, there will be no scheduled
zero and span cycles in the system. See Section 2.3
Calibration Menu for details.
▪ If CAL (CALIBRATION) is programmed, system generates the
zero and span adjust figures which are applied to the reaction
results. If CHECK is programmed, system does not generate
any zero or span adjust figures.
▪ The meaning of the abbreviations used in this menu are as
follows:
-No function is programmed.
S
Span reactions only.
Z
Zero reactions only.
ZS
Zero reactions followed by Span reactions.
CAL
Calibration reactions
CHECK Check reactions.
8.2.8 4-20mA Program
OUTPUT MODE
DIRECT
▪ OUTPUT MODE specifies the 4-20mA outputs operation. This
parameter is programmed as: DIRECT (direct mode by default),
BASIC (basic mode), STREAM MUX (stream multiplex mode) or
FULL MUX (full multiplex mode).
▪ In DIRECT mode, each 4-20mA output channel is dedicated to a
specific stream and result type.
▪ In BASIC mode, 4-20mA signals of zero and span
calibration/check reactions are also sent to the 4-20mA channels
programmed as STREAM 1.
▪ In STREAM MUX and FULL MUX modes, specific channels are
dedicated to periodically change their value in steps to indicate
the stream number and result type. This periodic operation
reduces the number of required 4-20mA channels significantly. If
STREAM MUX and FULL MUX modes are required, please
contact manufacturer or distributor for the complete protocols
and the details of required system configuration modifications.
Page 105
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
STREAM 1
25mgC/l
STREAM 1
100mgC/l
STREAM 2
100%
--100mgC/l
SIGNAL FAULT
YES
FAULT LEVEL
1.0mA
OUTPUT < 4mA
0%
EXCLUDE RESULTS
3
TOC
INST
TIC
INST
DW%
INST
TIC
AVRG
▪ In CHANNEL 1 STREAM 1 TOC setting, the first parameter
defines the type of 4-20mA output which can be programmed as:
STREAM and MANUAL reaction results, CAL (zero & span
calibration results), CAL Z (zero results) and CAL S (span
results). The second parameter is the data type which can be
programmed as TOC, TIC, TC, VOC, BOD, COD and DW%.
See Section 8.2.4
COD/BOD/DW Program for details. In
TIC & TOC analysis mode, TC is the sum of TIC and TOC.
▪ In CHANNEL 1 25mgC/l
INST setting, the first
parameter (e.g. 25mgC/l) is the full scale of the channel. The
second parameter could be programmed as INST
(Instantaneous) or AVRG (Average).
▪ If INST is selected, the result for the selected stream is updated
at the end of each reaction. If AVRG is selected, the average
result of the 24 hour reactions is updated for the specific stream
at the AVERAGE UPDATE time programmed in Sequence
Program, Average Program menu.
▪ When DW% (Drinking Water % REMOVAL) data type is
selected, system automatically defaults to STREAM 2 (OUTLET
STREAM) and the full scale of the channel is fixed to 100%. See
Section 8.2.4 COD/BOD/DW Program for details.
▪ When ANALYSIS TYPE is changed in Analysis Mode menu,
modifications on the 4-20mA result type and the channel full
scale may be required.
▪ When SIGNAL FAULT is activated (YES) by default, if a fault
occurs, system sends the FAULT LEVEL signal below for all 420mA channels. When it is set to (NO), 4-20mA outputs do not
signal FAULT LEVEL if a fault occurs and system keeps sending
live data on the outputs.
▪ FAULT (1.0mA by default) specifies the fault output level for all
system 4-20mA channels.
▪ OUTPUT < 4mA function defines the factor (0% by default) to be
applied on the stream value if the output value becomes smaller
than 4mA (negative result). This function allows the user to
clamp or reduce the effect of negative result on the 4-20mA
output value.
▪ For instance, if the OUTPUT value is set as 100%, 100% of the
negative result is sent as 4-20mA signal. If the setting is 50%,
50% of the negative results is sent as 4-20mA signal. When the
setting is 0%, no negative result is send and any negative result
is clamped to 4mA (0mgC/l) level.
▪ When OUTPUT MODE is programmed as BASIC above,
EXCLUDE RESULTS defines the number of stream analysis
reactions (3 by default) to be omitted after the zero and/or span
calibration/check reactions. This is achieved by keeping the
calibration output relay activated until the programmed number
of stream analysis is completed. In other words, the calibration
contact remains active for a programmable number of online
reactions after the completion of the calibration cycle. This
function helps to ignore any possible calibration impact on the
system response.
Page 106
8.2.9 Alarm Program
ALARM 1
TOC
ALARM 2
TIC
ALARM 3
COD
CO2 ALARM 1
CO2 ALARM 2
CO2 ALARM 3
STREAM 1
20.0mgC/l
STREAM 2
10.0mgC/l
STREAM 1
70.0mgO/l
50.0ppm
100.0ppm
150.0ppm
--> PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
▪ If ALARM 1-3 is not programmed in Output Devices menu, this
option will not be available in this menu.
▪ ALARM 1-3 operates on a specific stream and reaction result
type. In “ALARM 1 TOC STREAM 1” setting, TOC is the desired
reaction result, which can also be programmed as COD, BOD,
TIC, TC or VOC. STREAM 1 is the selected stream.
▪ In ALARM 1 20.0mgC/l setting, 20mgC/l defines the desired
alarm activation level. The concentration level determines the
alarm condition where the Alarm Relay is set or reset at the end
of each reaction once the calibrated result is known.
▪ If CO2 ALARM 1-3 is not programmed in Output Devices menu,
this option will not be available in this menu.
▪ CO2 ALARM 1-3 is a predictor function of a possible high
TOC/TC (COD or BOD if programmed) level for a specific
stream. By default, this function is disabled by 0.0ppm setting. If
programmed, it provides an earlier warning of an unusually high
TOC result from the rising slope of the CO2 peak generated
during the reaction.
▪ If programmed, the alarm level (ppm CO2 peak) need to be
selected carefully considering the temperature effect, which
could be significant on the CO2 peaks. In other words, enough
margins needs to be given for the settings which will create an
actual early warning for an unusually high reading. At the end of
the reaction, the CO2 Alarm Relay status is maintained or reset
depending on the reading. In addition, this function is only
suitable for multi-stream systems operating on fixed ranges, or
systems operating on a single range. The use of this function is
not recommended for systems which uses automatic range
change.
▪ Note that in TIC & TOC and VOC analysis types, the CO2 peak
used for the CO2 ALARM 1-3 is the TOC CO2 peak. In TC and
TC – TIC analysis type, the CO2 peak used is the TC CO2 peak.
▪ Programmable Outputs is a link to Output Devices,
Programmable Outputs menu.
Page 107
8.2.10
Data Program
MMC/SD CARD
PRINT MODE
ENGINEERING
REACTION ON-LINE
YES
FAULT ON-LINE
YES
CONTROL CHARS
NO
DECIMAL
POINT
8.2.11
▪ This menu allows the user to program the output device
communication port configuration profiles for MMC/SD flash
card.
▪ PRINT MODE specifies the format in which the data will be sent
over the communication port to all output devices. The available
modes are STANDARD (includes time, date and calibrated
analysis data etc.), and ENGINEERING (includes un-calibrated
data, temperature and atmospheric pressure, pump diagnostic
information, liquid phase measurement information etc. in
addition to the STANDARD data).
▪ REACTION ON-LINE enables (YES by default) or disables (NO)
the automatic printout of the reaction result at the end of each
reaction.
▪ FAULT ON-LINE enables (YES by default) or disables (NO) the
automatic printout of a fault or warning log as soon as it occurs.
▪ CONTROL CHARS enables (YES) or disables (NO by default)
the control characters sent with the RS232 data for the output
device operation.
▪ DECIMAL specifies whether a POINT (.) by default or a COMMA
(,) character represents the decimal point in the downloaded
analysis data files for all output devices.
Information
CONTACT INFORMATION
SOFTWARE
VERSION
02.01.00
DATE
May 5 2011
▪ Contact menu displays the contact details of the manufacturer
and if programmed the distributor.
▪ VERSION displays the system firmware (software) revision
number.
▪ DATE displays the firmware (software) revision date.
IDENTIFICATION
B5C 2.01 247
▪ IDENTICIFATION displays the specific identification number
(system serial number) for the BioTector.
Page 108
8.3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU
System Configuration menus are used to configure the system in the factory. The user should avoid any
modifications in these menu settings unless it is absolutely necessary.
System Configuration Menu Diagram
Page 109
8.3.1 Analysis Mode
ANALYSIS TYPE
DEMO MODE
DEMO MODE
DEMO MODE CO2 DATA
TIC CURVE PEAK
TIC CURVE WIDTH
TIC CURVE DELAY
TOC CURVE WIDTH
TOC CURVE PEAK
TOC CURVE DELAY
TC CURVE WIDTH
TC CURVE PEAK
TC CURVE DELAY
▪ ANALYSIS TYPE defines BioTector’s analysis modes, which are
TIC+TOC (TIC&TOC), TC and VOC. TIC&TOC and VOC
systems can be programmed to run in TIC+TOC, TC and VOC
analysis types. If it is necessary to run a TIC&TOC system in
any other analysis modes, please contact the distributor or the
manufacturer.
▪ When the analysis type is changed, the system automatically
modifies several system configuration parameters and resets
them to their default values. Therefore, when this function is
entered, before the analysis type is changed, system
automatically displays a “CAUTION! CHANGING ANALYSIS
TYPE ALTERS SYSTEM PARAMETERS AND REQUIRES
USER TO CHANGE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
PLEASE PRESS ESCAPE OR RIGHT ARROW TO PROCEED.”
warning to the user to inform the user about the changes
required in the system configuration settings.
▪ Systems, which are built with two or more analysis type options,
are shipped with the relevant system configurations, which are
available in both electronic format and as printouts. When the
user changes the analysis type of the system, the necessary
system configuration modifications needs to be carried out
following the procedures described in information sheet “M067.
BioTector Arm Configuration Upgrade Procedure”, which is
available in the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector. When
the procedures are followed, the system configuration settings
will be updated automatically.
Alternatively, all system
configuration modifications can be carried out manually by
looking at the corresponding configuration printout.
TIC+TOC
▪ When DEMO MODE (OFF by default) is activated (ON), system
can be started to operate in demonstration mode. In this mode,
BioTector does not require any reagents or carrier gas to
operate. When BioTector is started using the Operation menus,
the relevant CO2 peaks are generated artificially to demonstrate
the operation of the system. Because the system normal
operation is inhibited, system automatically displays a warning to
the user before the DEMO MODE is activated.
OFF
1000ppm
25s
2s
3000ppm
55s
5s
4000ppm
65s
5s
▪ The TIC/TOC/TC CURVE PEAK/WIDTH/DELAY functions in
Demo Mode CO2 Data menu allows the user to program the
size of the relevant CO2 peaks, the duration of the CO2 peaks
and the time delays artificially generated during the DEMO
MODE operation.
▪ In TC and VOC systems, the relevant TIC/TOC/TC CURVE
PEAK/WIDTH/DELAY parameters are displayed.
Page 110
8.3.2 System Program
SYSTEM PROGRAM 1
SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 TIC + TOC
Sample Pump
ANALYZER ZERO
15s, 20 l/h
TIC ACID
6p
SAMPLE LINE FILL
4p
SAMPLE IN
20p,
DELAY
1s, 1 l/h
SAMPLE PORT PURGE
0.2s
TIC SPARGE TIME
P-V
36s, 20 l/h
BASE
34p
BASE OXIDATION
90s, 10 l/h
TOC ACID
28p
▪ SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 TIC + TOC defines the system
parameters for Oxidation Phase operation in TIC & TOC
analysis mode. In TIC & TOC analysis mode, the TIC and TOC
contents of a sample are measured consecutively by means of a
single sample injection into a single reactor.
▪ SAMPLE PUMP is a shortcut to Commissioning, Sample Pump
menu. See Section 8.2.2 Sample Pump for details.
▪ CO2 analyzer establishes a zero offset level for the ANALYZER
ZERO time (15s by default) with the oxygen flow (20 l/h)
settings.
▪ A “12_HIGH CO2 IN O2” fault is generated during this phase
and BioTector stops if the CO2 analyzer’s reading is higher than
CO2 ZERO LINE plus the CO2 ZERO ALARM value (250ppm
by default) for three consecutive reactions. See Section 8.3.8
Fault Setup for details.
▪ TIC ACID specifies the amount of acid reagent (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at range 1.
▪ SAMPLE LINE FILL defines the number of pulses Sample Pump
operates forward to fill the sample tube between the Sample
Valve and the Reactor Valve.
▪ SAMPLE IN defines the amount of sample (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at operation range 1. P-V stands for
“Pinch Valve”, which identifies the type of valve used during
sample injection.
▪ A single pulse pump operation corresponds to ½ revolution of
the pump roller.
▪ Note that any change carried out on the factory SAMPLE IN
setting requires recalibration of the system.
▪ DELAY is the time (1 second by default) the carrier gas is
activated to inject the reagents into the Mixer Reactor with a flow
of 1 l/h by default.
▪ SAMPLE PORT PURGE defines the time (0.2 seconds by
default) Sample Pump operates reverse after the sample
injection. With this operation, the sample liquid, located inside
the tubing between the Reactor Valve (MV3) and the T fitting, is
discharged.
▪ BioTector sparges and measures the TIC content of the sample
for the TIC SPARGE TIME (36s) with the oxygen flow (20 l/h)
settings.
▪ If the TIC level does not drop below the TIC CHECK level
(10ppm CO2 by default in Reaction Check menu) by the end of
TIC SPARGE TIME, BioTector automatically extends this time
(extension time) until the TIC level drops below 10ppm level.
▪ A “50_TIC OVERFLOW” warning is generated and BioTector
keeps running if the TIC level does not drop below 10ppm by the
end of the maximum extension time, which is 300 seconds. The
maximum extension time is not a programmable function. It is a
fixed figure within the system software.
▪ BASE defines the amount of base (in pulses) to be injected into
the reactor for the reaction at range 1.
▪ BioTector oxidizes the sample for the BASE OXIDATION time
with the oxygen flow (10 l/h) settings. If any CO2 is released
during this phase, it is measured and added to the TOC result
because the default setting of PEAK INTEGRATION is
TOC+BASE OXID in Result Integration menu.
▪ TOC ACID states the amount of acid (in pulses) to be injected
into the reactor for the TOC SPARGE phase at range 1.
Page 111
TOC SPARGE TIME
75s, 20 l/h
TOC OXIDATION
25s
REACTOR PURGE
54s
PRESSURE CHECK
20s, 40 l/h
PRESSURE RELEASE
14s, 45 l/h
PRESSURE PURGE
7s, 60 l/h
PRESSURE RELEASE
8s,45 l/h
CYCLES
0
ANALYZER PURGE
30s 40 l/h
IDLE O2 FLOW
1 l/h
REACTION TIME
5m25s
▪ BioTector sparges and measures the TOC content of the sample
for the TOC SPARGE TIME (75s by default) with the oxygen
flow (20 l/h) settings.
▪ If the TOC level does not drop below the TOC CHECK level
(25ppm CO2 by default in Reaction Check menu) at the end of
TOC OXIDATION TIME, BioTector automatically extends this
time (extension time) until the TOC level drops below 25ppm
level.
▪ A “51_TOC OVERFLOW” warning is generated if the TOC level
does not drop below 25ppm at the end of the maximum
extension time, which is 300 seconds. The maximum extension
time is not a programmable function. It is a fixed figure within the
system software.
▪ TOC OXIDATION determines the time (25s by default), the
ozone generator will be running at the start of the TOC Sparge
phase. Note that TOC OXIDATION time is part of the TOC
Sparge phase and does not increase the TOC SPARGE TIME.
▪ REACTOR PURGE displays the overall time, the BioTector
purges the Mixer Reactor.
▪ During the REACTOR PURGE phase, system continuously
monitors the oxygen gas flow using the mass flow controller. If
any gas leak or any flow problem is detected during this phase,
BioTector generates a “06_PRESSURE CHCK FAIL” or a
“02_LOW O2 FLOW - SO” fault and stops. These faults are
logged into the fault archive.
▪ PRESSURE CHECK defines the time and oxygen gas flow (20
seconds at 40 l/h) the Mixer Reactor is pressurized for the
REACTOR PURGE phase above.
▪ When the gas flow is equal to or less than the PRESSURE
CHECK FAULT level, which is 6.0 l/h defined in Sequence
Program, Pressure/Flow Test Program menu, for longer than 1
second during the PRESSURE CHECK phase above, BioTector
opens the Reactor Valve (MV3) and releases the pressure of the
reactor for 14 seconds at 45 l/h oxygen flow by default using the
PRESSURE RELEASE function. With this process, the majority
of the liquid present in the Mixer Reactor is discharged into drain
through the Sample Out port.
▪ When PRESSURE RELEASE phase above is completed, using
the PRESSURE PURGE function, the Mixer Reactor is
pressurized once again for 7 seconds at a higher oxygen flow of
60 l/h by default.
▪ When the PRESSURE PURGE phase above is completed,
BioTector opens the Reactor Valve (MV3) and releases the
pressure of the reactor for 10 seconds at 45 l/h oxygen flow by
default using the PRESSURE RELEASE function.
▪ Unlike the first PRESSURE RELEASE phase described above,
the motor of the Mixer Reactor is activated during this phase.
With this process, any remaining liquid present in the Mixer
Reactor is discharged into drain through the Sample Out port.
▪ CYCLES defines the number of times the PRESSURE PURGE
and the PRESSURE RELEASE phases take place during the
REACTOR PURGE phase.
▪ BioTector purges the CO2 analyzer for the ANALYZER PURGE
time (30s by default) with the oxygen flow (40 l/h) settings.
▪ When the BioTector is not running, that is when it is powered up
and in stop state, or when it is in remote standby state, the
carrier gas flow is set to 1 l/h by default.
▪ REACTION TIME displays the total reaction time (in minutes and
seconds) for range 1, based on all programmed settings above.
Page 112
SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 TC
PRE OXIDATION
25s ,
10
VOC OXIDATION
25s ,
0
TC SPARGE TIME
50s 20l/h
TC ACID
28p
TC OXIDATION
25s
SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 VOC
SAMPLE PUMP FORWARD 2
3s
▪ SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 TC defines the system parameters for
Oxidation Phase operation in TC analysis mode. In TC analysis
mode, the TC content of a sample is measured by means of a
single sample injection into a single reactor.
▪ When the Analysis Type is changed to TC, the System Program
1 menu is automatically updated with the corresponding TC
system parameters. The TC system parameters, which are not
covered in SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 TIC + TOC above are as
follows:
▪ PRE OXIDATION defines the time (45s by default) and oxygen
flow (10 l/h) settings for the initial oxidation stage, where
hydroxyl radicals are generated for the VOC Oxidation phase.
▪ VOC OXIDATION states the time (45s) and oxygen flow (0 l/h no
flow by default) settings for the VOC Oxidation stage, where the
volatile organic carbon element of the sample is oxidized.
▪ The objective of no oxygen flow at this reaction phase is to
prevent the loss of any volatiles before they are oxidized.
▪ BioTector sparges and measures the TC content of the sample
for the TC SPARGE TIME (150s by default) with the oxygen flow
(20 l/h) settings.
▪ If the TC level does not drop below the TC CHECK level (25ppm
CO2 by default in Reaction Check menu) at the end of TC
OXIDATION time, BioTector automatically extends this time
(extension time) until the TC level drops below 25ppm level.
▪ A “91_TC OVERFLOW” warning is generated if the TC level
does not drop below 25ppm at the end of the maximum
extension time, which is 300 seconds. The maximum extension
time is not a programmable function. It is a fixed figure within the
system software.
▪ TC ACID states the amount of acid (in pulses) to be injected into
the reactor for the TC SPARGE phase in TC mode at range 1.
▪ TC OXIDATION determines the time (75s by default), the ozone
generator will be running at the start of the TC Sparge phase.
Note that TC OXIDATION time is part of the TC Sparge phase
and does not increase the TC SPARGE TIME.
▪ SYSTEM PROGRAM 1 VOC defines the system parameters for
Oxidation Phase operation in VOC analysis mode. In VOC
analysis mode, two reactions (first one in TC mode and the
second one in TIC & TOC mode) are run consecutively by
means of two sample injections into a single reactor.
▪ When the Analysis Type is changed to VOC, the System
Program 1 menu is automatically updated with the
corresponding VOC system parameters. The VOC system
parameters, which are not covered in SYSTEM PROGRAM 1
TIC + TOC and TC analysis modes above is as follows:
▪ SAMPLE PUMP FORWARD 2 specifies the Sample Pump’s
forward operation time (3s by default), where the Sample Pump
runs forward to fill the sample line with sample liquid, prior to the
second sample injection into the reactor for the second TIC &
TOC analysis reaction in VOC systems.
Page 113
SYSTEM PROGRAM 2
SYSTEM PROGRAM 2 TIC + TOC
RANGE CHANGE 1-2
50.0mgC/l
RANGE CHANGE 1-3
RANGE CHANGE 2-1
150.0mgC/l
40.0mgC/l
SAMPLE IN
5p
TIC ACID
12p
BASE
70p
BASE OXIDATION
130s
TOC ACID
58p
P-V
▪ RANGE CHANGE 1-2 defines the concentration levels for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 1 to
range 2.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 1-2 is typically the top concentration
point of TOC RANGE 1 in System Range Data menu by default.
▪ RANGE CHANGE 1-3 specifies the concentration level for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 1 to
range 3.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 1-3 is typically 50-75% of the top
concentration point of TOC RANGE 2 in System Range Data
menu by default.
▪ RANGE CHANGE 2-1 states the concentration level for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 2 to
range 1.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 2-1 is typically 20% less of the top
concentration point of TOC RANGE 1 in System Range Data
menu by default.
▪ SAMPLE IN identifies the amount of sample (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at range 2.
▪ TIC ACID defines the amount of acid reagent (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at range 2.
▪ BASE specifies the amount of base (in pulses) to be injected into
the reactor for the BASE OXIDATION phase at range 2.
▪ BASE OXIDATION defines the oxidation time (150s by default),
which can be programmed independently for range 2.
▪ If the Base Oxidation time is different than the one programmed
in System Program 1 menu, depending on the difference
between the two settings, the reaction time at range 2 will be
either longer or shorter than the reaction time displayed in
System Program 1 menu.
▪ TOC ACID states the amount of acid (in pulses) to be injected
into the reactor for the TOC SPARGE phase at range 2.
Page 114
SYSTEM PROGRAM 2 TC
SAMPLE IN
5p , P-V
▪ All system parameters for SYSTEM PROGRAM 2 VOC analysis
mode are covered in System Program 2 TC and System
Program 2 TIC + TOC above.
SYSTEM PROGRAM 2 VOC
SYSTEM PROGRAM 3
SYSTEM PROGRAM 3 TIC + TOC
RANGE CHANGE 2-3
150.0 mgC/l
RANGE CHANGE 3-2
120.0mgC/l
RANGE CHANGE 3-1
40.0mgC/l
SAMPLE IN
▪ SAMPLE IN defines the amount of sample (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor in TC mode at range 2.
3p
P-V
TIC ACID
12p
BASE
70p
BASE OXIDATION
130s
TOC ACID
58p
▪ RANGE CHANGE 2-3 defines the concentration level for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 2 to
range 3.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 2-3 is typically the top concentration
point of TOC RANGE 2 in System Range Data menu by default.
▪ RANGE CHANGE 3-2 specifies the concentration level for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 3 to
range 2.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 3-2 is typically 20% less of the top
concentration point of TOC RANGE 2 in System Range Data
menu by default.
▪ RANGE CHANGE 3-1 defines the concentration level for the
BioTector to change its range automatically from range 3 to
range 1.
▪ The RANGE CHANGE 3-1 is typically 20% less of the top
concentration point of TOC RANGE 1 in System Range Data
menu by default.
▪ SAMPLE IN states the amount of sample (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at range 3.
▪ TIC ACID defines the amount of acid reagent (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor at range 3.
▪ BASE specifies the amount of base (in pulses) to be injected into
the reactor for the BASE OXIDATION phase at range 3.
▪ BASE OXIDATION defines the oxidation time (150s by default),
which can be programmed independently for range 3.
▪ If the Base Oxidation time is different than the one programmed
in System Program 1 menu, depending on the difference
between the two settings, the reaction time at range 3 will be
either longer or shorter than the reaction time displayed in
System Program 1 menu.
▪ TOC ACID states the amount of acid (in pulses) to be injected
into the reactor for the TOC SPARGE phase at range 3.
Page 115
SYSTEM PROGRAM 3 TC
SAMPLE IN
TC ACID
5p , P-V
58p
▪ SAMPLE IN defines the amount of sample (in pulses) to be
injected into the reactor in TC mode at range 3.
▪ TC ACID states the amount of acid (in pulses) to be injected into
the reactor for the TC SPARGE phase in TC mode at range 3.
▪ All system parameters for SYSTEM PROGRAM 3 VOC analysis
mode are covered in System Program 3 TC and System
Program 3 TIC + TOC above.
SYSTEM PROGRAM 3 VOC
8.3.3 Calibration Data
DECIMAL PLACES
3
TOC/TC CALIBRATION 1
TOC/TC CALIBRATION 2
TOC/TC CALIBRATION 3
TIC CALIBRATION 1
TIC CALIBRATION 2
TIC CALIBRATION 3
▪ DECIMAL PLACES setting defines the number of decimal
places (0, 1, 2 or 3) system displays in the reaction results and
in the relevant system menus.
▪ The default unit for reaction results is mg/l “milligrams per liter”.
Depending on application requirements and preferences, it is
possible to configure the system to display the results in ppm
“parts per million”, in µg/l “micrograms per liter” or in ppb “parts
per billion”. For further information, contact your local distributor
or the manufacturer.
▪ Calibration menus are used to install the calibration data and
thus to calibrate the BioTector in factory. TOC CALIBRATION 1,
2 and 3 shows the calibration curves for range 1, 2 and 3
respectively. In TC and VOC systems, the TOC CALIBRATION
1/2/3 menus are named as TC CALIBRATION 1/2/3.
▪ The first column shows the number of calibration points, the
second point [%] shows the calibration factors automatically
calculated from the calibration data, the third column
STANDARD shows the standard solution concentrations and the
fourth column shows the un-calibrated result (mgC/l) measured
and calculated from the CO2 analyzer readings.
▪ System calibration curves should not be modified by the user on
site unless a recalibration of the system is required at a different
analysis range.
8.3.4 Sequence Program
8.3.4.1
Average Program
LOG AVERAGE
NO
AVERAGE UPDATE
00:00
▪ LOG AVERAGE function enables (YES) or disables (NO by
default) the 24-hour averaging of the reaction results in the
reaction archive.
▪ The reaction results obtained from manual samples are not
included in the averaging calculations.
▪ If the LOG AVERAGE above is enabled (YES), the system
calculates a 24 hours average of the reaction results and
displays it in the reaction archive for each stream at the time
programmed for AVERAGE UPDATE (00:00, HR:MIN, by
default).
Page 116
8.3.4.2
Zero Program
ZERO PROGRAM
ZERO PROGRAM MAX
ZERO AVERAGE
ZERO BAND
5 ,
3 ,
3
2 ,
2
10
3 ,
0.050mgC/l
▪ In ZERO PROGRAM 5, 3, 3 setting, the first, second and third
inputs define the minimum number of reactions to be carried out
at Range 1, Range 2 and Range 3 respectively during the Zero
Calibration and Zero Check cycles. Zero cycles are activated by
RUN ZERO CALIBRATION/CHECK functions in Zero Calibration
menu or by START NEW REAGENT CYCLE function in Install
New Reagents menu.
▪ If two or any of the three ZERO PROGRAM settings is set to
zero, system runs the zero calibration/check reactions only at
the programmed range(s) and calculates the TOC Zero Adjust
values for the corresponding range(s) using the measured zero
adjust figure.
▪ ZERO PROGRAM MAX defines the maximum number of zero
reactions system will operate at a specific range if the
corresponding AVERAGE ZERO reading is not within the
programmed ZERO BAND below. The corresponding AVERAGE
ZERO result is calculated from the programmed number of
readings defined in ZERO AVERAGE below. This parameter is
common to all ranges.
▪ In ZERO AVERAGE 3, 2, 2 setting, the first, second and third
inputs define the number of zero reactions to be averaged to get
a representative Zero Adjust value for Range 1, Range 2 and
Range 3 respectively.
▪ ZERO BAND is the mgC/l concentration band for the TOC/TC
readings obtained during the Zero Calibration or Zero Check
reactions. System initially runs the minimum number of reactions
and calculates the average value at a specific programmed
range. If the variation between the average result and each of
the reaction results used in the averaging is not higher than the
programmed ZERO BAND, the system completes its zero cycle
and generates the necessary Zero Adjust figures. However, if
any of the reaction results used in averaging is outside the band,
then the system runs an additional Zero Reaction, and evaluates
the readings again using the new average value. This cycle is
repeated until the system obtains stable zero readings, which
must be within the ZERO BAND. If stable zero readings are
obtained within a certain number of reactions, which is less than
or equal to the maximum number of reactions defined in ZERO
PROGRAM MAX above, the Zero Adjust values are generated
without any system warning.
▪ If zero stability is obtained on the executed range, system does
not seek for further stability on the subsequent ranges.
▪ If the system cannot reach stable zero readings, in other words,
if one or more of the TOC/TC readings are outside the
programmed ZERO BAND at the end of the maximum number of
reactions, depending on the type of zero cycle, system creates a
“42_ZERO CAL FAIL” or a “43_ZERO CHCK FAIL” warning and
logs it into the fault archive. When a “42_ZERO CAL FAIL
warning occurs, system does not generate any Zero Adjust
figures and continues operation using the previous Zero Adjust
values.
Page 117
ZERO WATER
NO
pH ADJUST BASE
14 ,
pH ADJUST TIME
60s
SERVICE ZERO
ZERO ADJUST HISTORY
0 ,
20 , 5
0
▪ When ZERO WATER (programmed as “NO” by default) is
programmed as “YES”, BioTector takes DI Water from the
available system port (which could be the ZERO WATER port or
MANUAL/CALIBRATION port, and if these ports are not
available SAMPLE 1 port), and uses DI Water as a sample
during the Zero Calibration and Zero Check cycles.
▪ When this function is activated, the relevant system messages
are also displayed in Install New Reagents menu. See section
2.2.2.1
Install New Reagents for details.
▪ The three pH ADJUST BASE parameters defines the number of
pulses the base reagent pump operates to inject base reagent
into the reactor at each available system operation range, which
are Range 1, Range 2 and Range 3.
▪ This function is used to neutralize the pH of the Mixer Reactor.
▪ pH ADJUST TIME determines the mixing time (60 seconds by
default) the Mixer Reactor operates for the pH neutralization of
the reactor.
▪ SERVICE ZERO specifies the number of zero calibration cycles
to be repeated after a defined number of reactions between
each zero calibration cycle. The first setting “20” is the number of
reactions between each zero calibration cycle, and the second
setting “5” is the total number of zero calibration cycles which will
be carried out.
▪ SERVICE ZERO cycle is activated by the SET SERVICE ZERO
function in Service menu.
▪ Anytime the Zero Adjust value is changed, either manually by
the user or automatically by the system, the new Zero Adjust
value is stored in the Zero Adjust History archive with the time,
date, zero range and the zero type (calibration, check or manual)
information.
▪ The meaning of the codes used in the system for zero adjust are
as follows:
TOC/TC-ZC: Zero calibration result for TOC/TC.
TOC/TC-ZK: Zero check result for TOC/TC.
TOC/TC-ZM: Manually input Zero Adjust for TOC/TC.
Page 118
8.3.4.3
Span Program
SPAN PROGRAM
5
SPAN AVERAGE
3
RANGE
1
TOC CAL STD
10.0mgC/l
TOC CHECK STD
10.0mgC/l
TIC CAL STD
5.0mgC/l
TIC CHECK STD
5.0mgC/l
▪ SPAN PROGRAM defines the number of reactions to be carried
out for Span Calibration and Span Check cycles, which are
activated by RUN SPAN CALIBRATION/CHECK functions in
Span Calibration menu. If the Span Calibration or Span Check
is programmed as YES in New Regents Program menu, START
NEW REAGENT CYCLE function in Install New Reagents menu
will also run the relevant span cycle.
▪ The span calibration/check reactions are run at a single range
programmed by the RANGE below. System calculates and uses
the same Span Adjust values for other ranges as well.
▪ SPAN AVERAGE is the number of span reactions the system
averages to calculate the Span Adjust factor.
▪ RANGE (1 by default) determines the range at which all Span
Calibration and Span Check reactions are carried out.
▪ TOC CALIBRATION STANDARD defines the TOC standard
solution concentration level (mgC/l) to be used in Span
Calibration reactions.
▪ If TOC CALIBRATION STANDARD is programmed as 0.0mgC/l,
system ignores the Span Calibration results and omits any
related warnings defined in TOC BAND below.
▪ TOC CHECK STANDARD defines the TOC standard solution
concentration level (mgC/l) to be used in Span Check reactions.
▪ If TOC CHECK STANDARD is programmed as 0.0mgC/l,
system ignores the Span Check results and omits any related
warnings defined in TOC BAND below.
▪ TIC CALIBRATION STANDARD defines the TIC standard
solution concentration level (mgC/l) to be used in Span
Calibration reactions.
▪ If TIC CALIBRATION STANDARD is programmed as 0.0mgC/l,
system ignores the Span Calibration results and omits any
related warnings defined in TIC BAND below.
▪ In TC systems, TIC CALIBRATION STANDARD is not
displayed.
▪ TIC CHECK STANDARD defines the TIC standard solution
concentration level (mgC/l) to be used in Span Check reactions.
▪ If TIC CHECK STANDARD is programmed as 0.0mgC/l, system
ignores the Span Check results and omits any related warnings
defined in TIC BAND below.
▪ In TC systems, TIC CHECK STANDARD is not displayed.
Page 119
TC CAL STD
15.0mgC/l
TC CHECK STD
15.0mgC/l
TOC BAND
25%
TIC BAND
25%
TIC FACTOR = TOC
YES
SPAN ADJUST HISTORY
▪ In VOC systems, the sum of the TIC and TOC Calibration
Standard solution is displayed as TC Calibration Standard.
When TOC Calibration Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l
above, and when a concentration of TIC Calibration Standard is
programmed above, BioTector displays the TC Calibration
Standard as 0.0mgC/l on purpose. This allows the calibration of
TIC without any effect on the TC calibration. In other words, as
programmed, system ignores the TC span calibration results and
omits any TC related warnings.
▪ In VOC systems, the sum of the TIC and TOC Check Standard
solution is displayed as TC Check Standard. When TOC Check
Standard is programmed as 0.0mgC/l above, and when a
concentration of TIC Check Standard is programmed above,
BioTector displays the TC Check Standard as 0.0mgC/l on
purpose. This allows the check of TIC without any effect on the
TC check. In other words, as programmed, system ignores the
TC span check results and omits any TC related warnings.
▪ TOC BAND determines the tolerance limits (25% by default) for
the Span Calibration or Span Check reaction results for TOC.
▪ In TC and VOC systems, this function is named as TC BAND.
▪ If the average span result is outside the tolerance limits, a
“30_TOC/TC SPAN CAL FAIL” or “33_TOC/TC SPAN CHCK
FAIL” warning is logged depending on system analysis mode.
▪ TIC BAND determines the tolerance limits (25% by default) for
the Span Calibration or Span Check reaction results for TIC.
▪ If the average span result is outside the tolerance limits, a
“31_TIC SPAN CAL FAIL” or “34_TIC SPAN CHCK FAIL”
warning is logged.
▪ If the TIC FACTOR = TOC is selected as “YES” (by default), the
TOC span factor is used for TIC.
▪ If the TIC FACTOR = TOC setting is “YES”, when the TOC Span
Adjust value is changed, the TIC Span Adjust value will also
change automatically.
▪ In VOC systems, this function is named as TIC FACTOR = TC.
▪ Anytime the Span Adjust value is changed, either manually by
the user or automatically by the system, the new Span Adjust
factor is stored in the Span Adjust History archive with the time,
date, span RANGE, span type (calibration or check) and the
standard solution used.
▪ The meaning of the codes used in the system for span adjust
are as follows:
TOC/TC/TIC-SC: Span calibration result for TOC/TC/TIC.
TOC/TC/TIC-SK: Span check result for TOC/TC/TIC.
TOC/TC/TIC-SM: Manually input span adjust for TOC/TC/TIC.
Page 120
8.3.4.4
Reagents Purge
ACID & BASE PURGE
39s , 4
REACTOR ACID FILL
REACTOR BASE FILL
REACTOR WASH TIME
300p
450p
100s
8.3.4.5
▪ ACID & BASE PURGE defines the operation time (39 seconds
by default) of the acid and base pumps to prime the reagents
during the Install New Reagent cycle. The reagent priming and
the subsequent reactor purge operation is repeated 4 times by
default.
▪ The reagent purge is activated by START NEW REAGENT
CYCLE function in Install New Reagents menu or alternatively
by RUN REAGENTS PURGE function in Zero Calibration menu.
▪ The REACTOR ACID/BASE FILL time defines the quantity of
acid and base reagents injected into the reactor at the end of the
ACID & BASE PURGE phase described above.
▪ When the acid and base reagents are injected into the reactor,
the reagents are mixed in the reactor for the duration of
REACTOR WASH time (100 seconds by default) to balance and
neutralize the reactor pH.
Pressure/Flow Test Program
TIME
08:15
PRESSURE TEST FAULT
6.0l/h
PRESSURE TEST WARN
4.0l/h
▪ BioTector performs an automatic pressure and flow test every
day at the TIME programmed (at 08:15 hours by default).
▪ Each time BioTector is started up and every day during online
operation at the programmed TIME above, BioTector
pressurizes the system with oxygen gas and uses its mass flow
controller to detect any gas leak in the system. If the measured
flow is less than or equal to the programmed PRESSURE TEST
FAULT flow level (6.0 l/h by default), the pressure test passes.
▪ If the flow is greater than programmed PRESSURE TEST
FAULT setting, the pressure test fails, and BioTector generates
a “05_PRESSURE TEST FAIL” fault and stops. This fault is
logged in the fault archive. In TC – TIC systems, BioTector
generates a “07_TIC PRESSURE FAIL” fault if TIC reactor
pressure test fails.
▪ The pressure test cycle can be disabled by setting PRESSURE
TEST FAULT setting to 0.0 l/h. When disabled, BioTector
automatically displays an “OFF” message on the screen and
logs a “29_PRESSURE TEST OFF” warning in the fault archive.
▪ If the pressure test is skipped during the startup sequence with
the “Quick Startup” function (see Section 2.2.1
Start
Stop for details) a “28_NO PRESSURE TEST” warning is logged
in the fault archive. This warning cannot be acknowledged by the
user, it can only be acknowledged automatically by the system
the next time the pressure test is passed.
▪ PRESSURE TEST WARNING, which is typically 30% less than
the PRESSURE TEST FAULT setting (4.0 l/h by default), gives
an advanced warning of a possible gas leak in BioTector.
▪ The pressure warning can be disabled by setting PRESSURE
TEST WARNING to 0.0 l/h. When disabled, BioTector
automatically displays an “OFF” message on the screen.
▪ If the flow measured during Pressure Test is less than or equal
to 6.0 l/h but greater than 4.0 l/h, BioTector generates a
“26_PRESSURE TEST WARN” and continues to run. The
warning is logged in the fault archive. In TC – TIC systems,
BioTector generates a “27_TIC PRESSURE WARN” if TIC
reactor pressure test fails.
Page 121
PRESSURE CHCK FAULT
FLOW WARNING
REACTOR PURGE CHECK
REACTOR PURGE BAND
6.0l/h
45.0l/h
4s
3.0l/h
▪ At the end of each reaction during operation, BioTector
automatically pressurizes the system with oxygen gas and uses
its mass flow controller to detect any gas leak in the system. If
the measured flow is less than or equal to the programmed
PRESSURE CHECK FAULT flow level (locked to 6.0 l/h by
default) during the test, the pressure check passes. The
PRESSURE CHECK FAULT acts a safety function, to ensure
that there is no gas leak in the system and it is safe to start the
next analysis reaction.
▪ The pressure check cycle cannot be disabled in the system.
▪ If the flow measured during the pressure check is greater than
the programmed PRESSURE CHECK FAULT level (greater than
6.0 l/h) the pressure check fails, and BioTector generates a
“06_PRESSURE CHCK FAIL” fault and stops. This fault is
logged in the fault archive.
▪ Each time BioTector is started up and everyday during online
operation at the programmed TIME above, oxygen gas flows
through the system and mass flow controller is used to detect
any blockage in the system. If the measured flow is greater than
or equal to the programmed FLOW WARNING level (45.0 l/h by
default), the flow test passes.
▪ If the measured flow is less than the programmed FLOW
WARNING setting, the flow test fails, and BioTector generates a
“22_FLOW WARNING - EX” or “23_FLOW WARNING - SO” in
the fault archive and continues to run. This warning is logged in
the fault archive.
▪ In TC – TIC systems, BioTector generates a “24_TIC FLOW
WARN - EX” or “25_TIC FLOW WARN - SO” if TIC reactor flow
test fails.
▪ During the two Pressure Release phases of the Reactor Purge
carried out at the end of each analysis cycle described in section
8.3.2 System Program, BioTector monitors the oxygen gas flow
for 4 seconds (by default) with the REACTOR PURGE CHECK
function. This is carried out to detect any irregularities in the gas
flow, which may indicate a possible blockage or restriction in the
reactor and/or in the sample out lines, which includes Reactor
Valve (MV3) and Sample Valve (MV4).
▪ If the monitored oxygen gas flow readings during the REACTOR
PURGE CHECK are not stable and move outside the REACTOR
PURGE BAND, which is programmed as ±3 l/h by default,
during the first Pressure Release phase for three consecutive
times, a “128_REACTOR PURGE WARN” warning is logged in
the fault archive and BioTector keeps running.
▪ If the monitored oxygen gas flow readings are not stable and
move outside the REACTOR PURGE BAND during the second
Pressure Release phase and if a flow problem has already been
detected during the first Pressure Release phase of the same
Reactor Purge cycle, a “129_REACTOR PURGE FAIL” fault is
logged in the fault archive and BioTector stops.
Page 122
8.3.5 Output Devices
8.3.5.1
System Outputs
POWERED ALL TIME
VALVE ACTIVATION
OUTPUT 1-6
NO
SPF/SAMPLER
▪ POWERED ALL TIME parameter specifies if the relays are
powered all the time even if the system is stopped or paused
with the YES setting, or if the relay is powered only when
required with the default NO setting.
▪ VALVE ACTIVATION determines the two possible times for the
multi-stream valve to change over for the next stream. If the
default SPF (SAMPLE PUMP FORWARD) option is selected,
the valve for the next stream is selected as the Sample Pump
starts to run forward to bring the sample from the next stream. If
SPR (SAMPLE PUMP REVERSE) option is selected, the valve
for the next stream is selected when the Sample Pump reverse
operation is completed for the current stream, or when the
BioTector powers up.
▪ If SAMPLER is activated in Stream Program menu, SPF option
is displayed as SPF/SAMPLER.
▪ OUTPUT 1-6 menus typically contain internal output settings
related to system operation. These relay outputs, located on the
Motherboard, are system optional features.
▪ STREAM 1 is always functional as default within the system
software. OUTPUT 4-6 menus are not displayed as they are
reserved for future use.
▪ OUTPUT 1-6 relays are programmed to a single output function
or to multiple output functions if the relevant option has been
installed in the BioTector. The programmed output function or
functions are marked with an asterisk “*” sign in these menus as
in the example for OUTPUT 1, which is programmed for
MAINTANENCE SIGNAL and CALIBRATION SIGNAL below.
▪ When multiple functions are programmed for an output relay, the
relay output is activated when one or multiple conditions are
initiated. In the example below, OUTPUT 1 is activated when
MAINTANENCE SIGNAL or CALIBRATION SIGNAL is
triggered.
▪ In BioTector configuration data download (or in All Data
download), the programmed output functions for each output is
tabulated and marked with asterisk “*” signs for clarity.
Page 123
OUTPUT 1
DEFAULT STATE
N/D
STOP
FAULT
WARNING
NOTE
SAMPLER FILL
SAMPLER EMPTY
SAMPLER ERROR
SYNC
REMOTE STANDBY
MAN MODE TRIG
MAINT SIGNAL
TEMP. SWITCH
CAL
ZERO CAL
CAL SIGNAL
STREAM 1-3
MANUAL 1-3
SAMPLE STATUS 1-3
ALARM 1-3
CO2 ALARM 1-3
4-20mA CHNG
4-20mA CHNG 1-3
4-20mA READ
SAMPLE FAULT 1-3
COMPRESSOR
EQUALIZATION
SAMPLE PUMP REVERSE
DW FAIL
*
*
DEFAULT STATE defines the idle state of the relay. N/D stands for “Normally Deenergized” relay by default and N/E stands for “Normally Energized” relay.
Output set to operate when the BioTector is stopped condition. Note that remote standby is not considered as a stop condition.
Output set to operate on fault condition.
Output set to operate on warning condition.
Output activated when a notification is logged in the fault archive.
Fill signal, sent to the sampler, which remains on from start of sampler fill time to the
completion of the sample injection.
Empty signal, sent to the sampler, which is a pulse of 5 seconds duration and is
triggered after the Sample Pump reverse operation is complete.
Output when SAMPLER ERROR input signal is activated due to a sample error in the
BioTector Sampler.
Synchronization relay, use to synchronize the system with external control units.
Output when Remote Standby input is activated.
Indicates that manual reactions are activated and going to be executed regardless of
the activation is carried out manually on the keyboard or remotely from a system input.
Output when MAINTENANCE SWITCH input is activated.
Temperature Switch output activated when the temperature of the system increases
above the predefined system temperature control level (System Fan Control), which is
programmed as 20°C by default.
Calibration Valve used during span calibration/check reactions.
Calibration Valve used during zero calibration/check reactions.
Output set to operate on Zero/Span Check and Zero/Span Calibration reactions.
Output set for Stream Valves 1-3.
Output set for Manual Valves 1-3.
Digital output activated when BioTector Sample Sensor detects no sample
or when the sample quality is less than the default 75% threshold value for a specific
stream (i.e. when there is significant quantity of air bubbles in the stream/manual grab
sample lines).
Alarm relay, activated upon programmed alarm conditions for a specific stream.
CO2 Alarm relay, activated upon programmed CO2 alarm conditions for a specific
stream.
4-20mA output change flag relay, which is always activated for a period of 10s, when a
new result causes update of any of the 4-20mA output channels.
4-20mA output change flag relay, which is always activated for a period of 10s, when a
new result causes update of a given 4-20mA output channel for a specific stream.
This signal is used to indicate valid/stable values on 4-20mA output channels in 420mA Stream & Full Multiplex operation modes.
Output when the external stream specific SAMPLE FAULT 1-3 input signal is activated.
Output when the compressor (Valve 1-J7 on Oxygen Controller Board) is activated.
Output set to operate from the beginning of the Sample Pump forward operation until
the Sample Valve activation.
Digital output activated during Sample Pump reverse operation.
Digital output activated if the Drinking Water % REMOVAL value is a FAIL condition.
Page 124
8.3.5.2
Programmable Outputs
▪ POWER BOARD OUTPUT1-6 menus typically contain output
settings related to external devices. These relay outputs, located
on the Power and Input/Output Board, are system optional
features.
▪ POWER BOARD OUTPUT1-6 relays can be programmed to a
single output function or to multiple output functions as
described for OUTPUT 1-6 above. The programmed output
function or functions are marked with an asterisk “*” sign in these
menus as in the example for POWER BOARD OUTPUT 2,
which is programmed for STOP, FAULT, WARNING and NOTE
signals below.
▪ In the example below, POWER BOARD OUTPUT 2 is activated
when STOP or FAULT or WARNING or NOTE signal is
triggered.
▪ POWER BOARD OUTPUT 1 is a standard system relay
programmed to STOP, FAULT, WARNING and NOTE output
functions by default.
▪ In BioTector configuration data download (or in All Data
download), the programmed output functions for each output is
tabulated and marked with asterisk “*” signs for clarity as
illustrated below.
PWR BRD OUT 1-6
PWR BRD OUT 2
DEFAULT STATE
STOP
FAULT
WARNING
NOTE
SAMPLER FILL
………………………
………………………
N/E
*
*
*
*
..
..
Page 125
8.3.6 Reaction Check
CO2 LEVEL
FAULT TYPE
100ppm, AUTO
WARNING
REACTION COUNT
3
TIC CHECK
7ppm
TOC CHECK
25ppm
TC CHECK
25ppm
▪ Due to the organic and inorganic contamination in the BioTector
reagents, every TOC/TC reaction will generate a small level of
CO2 from the reagents alone even if there is no sample present.
The first setting (100ppm by default) of CO2 LEVEL specifies the
reaction check CO2 level, which is the minimum expected CO2
reading in ppm measured by the CO2 Analyzer in a reaction.
▪ The second setting (AUTO by default) of CO2 LEVEL defines
the reaction check CO2 level mode. When programmed as
AUTO, BioTector automatically sets the CO2 LEVEL to 60% of
the average CO2 peak reading recorded during the Zero
Calibration or Zero Check reactions. If it is set as MAN (Manual),
system uses the fixed programmed CO2 LEVEL value.
▪ BioTector looks for first an increase and then a decrease in the
CO2 peak data during the TOC phase (or TC phase depending
on ANALYSIS TYPE). If the CO2 peak occur at the wrong phase
of the reaction and/or if the CO2 peak is smaller than the
expected CO2 LEVEL (100ppm by default) for the number of
consecutive reactions defined by REACTION COUNT below (3
reactions by default), system generates a “04_REACTION
ERROR” warning or a “04_REACTION ERROR” fault
(depending on the FAULT TYPE setting below) and logs into the
fault archive.
▪ When CO2 LEVEL is programmed as 0ppm, the reaction check
function will be disabled. Reaction check function is omitted
during the zero calibration or zero check reactions.
▪ FAULT TYPE determines the type (WARNING or FAULT) of the
“04_REACTION ERROR” fault.
▪ When “04_REACTION ERROR” fault occurs, if FAULT TYPE is
programmed as WARNING (by default), BioTector keeps
running. If it is programmed as FAULT, BioTector stops.
▪ REACTION COUNT defines the number of consecutive
reactions (3 by default) before a “04_REACTION ERROR” fault
is triggered.
▪ TIC CHECK (7ppm CO2 by default) represents the CO2 check
point in the TIC phase. If the CO2 level is above the programmed
check point at the end of the TIC phase, then the system
automatically extends the TIC SPARGE TIME by 1 second and
checks the CO2 level again. If the TIC level does not drop below
the check point at the end of the maximum 300 seconds, a
“50_TIC OVERFLOW” warning is generated.
▪ TOC CHECK (25ppm CO2 by default) represents the CO2 check
point in the TOC phase. If the CO2 level is above the
programmed check point at the end of the TOC Oxidation
section of the TOC phase, then the system automatically
extends the TOC SPARGE TIME and TOC OXIDATION time by
1 second and checks the CO2 level again. If the TOC level does
not drop below the check point at the end of the maximum 300
seconds, a “51_TOC OVERFLOW” warning is generated.
▪ In TC and VOC systems, TC CHECK (25ppm CO2 by default)
represents the CO2 check point in the TC phase. If the CO2 level
is above the programmed check point at the end of the TC
Oxidation section of the TC phase, then the system
automatically extends the TC SPARGE TIME and TC
OXIDATION time by 1 second and checks the CO2 level again. If
the TC level does not drop below the check point at the end of
the maximum 300 seconds, a “91_TC OVERFLOW” warning is
generated.
Page 126
8.3.7 Result Integration
TOC INTEGRATION
3
TOC INT. LIMITS
10% , 0.100
▪ TOC INTEGRATION (3 by default) defines the number of
reaction results to be averaged to get the actual TOC result.
▪ TOC INTEGRATION LIMITS controls the averaging function
defined in TOC INTEGRATION above. The first parameter
“10%” defines the % band variation and the second parameter
“0.100” defines the absolute variation in mgC/l. If the reaction
result is outside the specified bands (TOC INTEGRATION
LIMITS), then the reaction result averaging is omitted. In other
words, the result, which is outside the TOC INTEGRATION
LIMITS, is displayed at the end of the reaction without
averaging. If the result is within the TOC INTEGRATION LIMITS,
the averaging function is continued and the programmed number
of reaction results (defined in TOC INTEGRATION above) is
averaged.
Page 127
8.3.8 Fault Setup
LOW O2 FLOW TIME
12s
HIGH O2 FLOW TIME
20s
BASE CO2 ALARM
250ppm
CO2 ZERO LINE
0ppm , AUTO
CO2 ZERO ALARM
250ppm
SERVICE COUNTER
180 DAYS
▪ If the O2 flow drops more than 50% of the MFC set value for
longer than the LOW O2 FLOW TIME (12s by default), a
“01_LOW O2 FLOW - EX” or “02_LOW O2 FLOW - SO” fault is
logged.
▪ If the O2 flow increases more than 50% of the MFC set value
during any reaction phase for longer than the HIGH O2 FLOW
TIME (20s by default), a “03_HIGH O2 FLOW” fault is logged.
▪ During the zero calibration & zero check reactions, system
monitors the CO2 peak level with the CO2 Analyzer. If the
monitored value is higher than the programmed BASE CO2
ALARM level (250ppm by default), a “52_HIGH CO2 IN BASE”
warning is logged into the fault archive.
▪ In the event of a “52_HIGH CO2 IN BASE” warning, BioTector
generates the relevant Zero Adjust factors automatically, at the
end of a successfully completed Zero Calibration cycle.
▪ When it is set as AUTO (Automatic by default), the CO2 ZERO
LINE value is updated automatically by the system during
Analyzer Zero phase. If it is set as M (Manual), the set value in
ppm is used as the fixed CO2 zero line.
▪ For instance, if there is a CO2 leak into the CO2 analyzer’s
source or detector sections, a typical of 400ppm CO2 level in the
environment will increase the CO2 ZERO LINE level to
≈250ppm within 24 days of online operation or approximately
after 5000 analysis cycles.
▪ If the concentration of CO2 measured during the Analyzer Zero
phase for the oxygen gas input is higher than CO2 ZERO LINE
plus CO2 ZERO ALARM (250ppm by default) value for 3
consecutive reactions, a “12_HIGH CO2 IN O2” fault is logged in
the fault archive and the system stops.
▪ The purpose of this function is to monitor the operation of the
oxygen concentrator. If the oxygen concentrator fails, then the
oxygen purity will be reduced and CO2 at atmospheric levels
(~400ppm) will enter the BioTector, and will be detected by the
CO2 analyzer. It is important not to run the BioTector with a
faulty oxygen concentrator as eventually water could enter the
BioTector with the contaminated oxygen gas, which may cause
damage on the Mass Flow Controller.
▪ SERVICE COUNTER (180 days by default) specifies the
number of days the system operates before triggering an
“83_SERVICE TIME” warning.
▪ Note that the service counter keeps operating and decreases the
count by a day if system is powered up during the same day
even though system was not running. Because the default
factory setting is a typical value for normal site conditions, the
service interval may need to be adjusted according to specific
site conditions.
Page 128
OZONE TEST TIME
18s
OZONE GEN ALARM
0.50A , 5s
OZONE GEN FAN ALARM
0.00V , 5s
SAMPLE STATUS
5s ,
ARCHIVE
NO
AUTO RESET
NO
SAMPLE FAULT 1
SAMPLE FAULT 2
SAMPLE FAULT 3
AUTO RESET
75%
1000s
1000s
1000s
NO
▪ OZONE TEST TIME defines the programmed time (18 seconds
by default), which passes the Ozone Test in Process Test,
Ozone Test menu. The maximum time the ozone generator
remains on during the Ozone Test is 60 seconds.
▪ OZONE GENERATOR ALARM defines the current (0.5A by
default) and the time (5 seconds by default) setting for the
“102_OZONE GEN FAULT” event. If the current drawn through
the Ozone Generator has dropped below 0.5 Amp for longer
than 5 seconds, BioTector generates a “102_OZONE GEN
FAULT” warning.
▪ OZONE GENERATOR FAN ALARM defines the Voltage Band
(0.0V by default) and the time (5 seconds by default) settings for
the “103_OZONE FAN FAULT” event. If the voltage on the
Ozone Generator Fan drops below 2.5V minus the Voltage Band
(i.e. 1.5V by default), or if the voltage increases more than 2.5V
plus the Voltage Band (i.e. 3.5V by default), for longer than 5
seconds, BioTector generates a “103_OZONE FAN FAULT”
warning.
▪ When OZONE GENERATOR FAN ALARM voltage is set to 0.0
Volt, then the Ozone Fan Fault generation is switched off.
▪ The first parameter in SAMPLE STATUS setting is the sample
detection time (5 seconds by default) BioTector processes the
output of the Sample Sensor. When the parameter is set to 0s
(zero seconds), the sample detection is switched off. The
second parameter (75% by default) is the % sample quality
threshold, which is used to activate SAMPLE STATUS output.
▪ Sample Status output is activated (energized) when BioTector
Sample Sensor detects no sample or when the sample quality is
less than the default 75% threshold value (i.e. when there is
significant quantity of air bubbles in the stream/manual grab
sample lines).
▪ Sample Status output is set/reset as soon as the Sample Sensor
signal is processed. Sample Status holds its state between
reactions and when system is stopped or put into standby mode.
▪ In systems built with Sample Sensor, if SAMPLE STATUS
ARCHIVE function is programmed as “YES”, the “116/117/118
LOW/NO SAMPLE 1/2/3” notification events are generated and
logged into the Fault Archive when there is no or low sample
liquid in the corresponding streams from stream 1 to stream 3.
▪ If SAMPLE STATUS AUTO RESET function is programmed as
“YES”, the corresponding “116/117/118 LOW/NO SAMPLE
1/2/3” notification events are automatically acknowledged in the
Fault Archive depending on the sample status of the relevant
streams from stream 1 to stream 3.
▪ In multi-stream systems, the Sample Status relay output signal is
a common signal, which is activated/deactivated when the
sample quality is determined by the BioTector Sample Sensor
for any of the streams during analysis.
▪ SAMPLE FAULT 1-3 defines the stream specific programmable
output time delay (1000 seconds by default), which delays the
activation of the SAMPLE FAULT 1-3 output signals and logging
of the “122/123/124 SAMPLE FAULT 1/2/3” notification events
into the fault archive. The purpose of the time delay is to prevent
unnecessary generation of the sample fault signals if the sample
fault only occurs for a very short time.
▪ SAMPLE FAULT AUTORESET determines whether the
“122/123/124 SAMPLE FAULT 1/2/3” notification events are
automatically acknowledged by the system (with the “YES”
setting) or to be acknowledged manually from the BioTector
keyboard (with the “NO” setting by default).
Page 129
COOLER ALARM
0.10A , 5s
COOLER FAN ALARM
1.00V , 5s
SIGMATAX FLT DELAY
900s
▪ COOLER ALARM defines the current (0.1A by default) and the
time (5 seconds by default) setting for the “107_COOLER
FAULT” event. If the current drawn through the Cooler has
dropped below 0.1 Amp for longer than 5 seconds, BioTector
generates a “107_COOLER FAULT” warning.
▪ When COOLER ALARM current is set to 0.0 Amp, then the
Cooler Fault generation is switched off.
▪ COOLER FAN ALARM defines the Voltage Band (1.0V by
default) and the time (5 seconds by default) settings for the
“108_COOLER FAN FAULT” event. If the voltage on the Cooler
Fan drops below 2.5V minus the Voltage Band (i.e. 1.5V by
default), or if the voltage increases more than 2.5V plus the
Voltage Band (i.e. 3.5V by default), for longer than 5 seconds,
BioTector generates a “108_COOLER FAN FAULT” warning.
▪ When COOLER FAN ALARM voltage is set to 0.0 Volt, then the
Cooler Fan Fault generation is switched off.
▪ The SIGMATAX FAULT DELAY function is displayed in systems
programmed to operate with the Sigmatax Sampler.
▪ The SIGMATAX FAULT DELAY defines the time (900 seconds
by default) during which any problems with the “sample ready”
signals, sent from the Sigmatax Sampler to the BioTector, are
ignored.
▪ When there is a problem with the “sample ready” signals, (i.e.
when the IR signal sent from Sigmatax Sampler is low for longer
than the SIGMATAX FAULT DELAY time or when the IR signal
is high for longer than 3600 seconds), BioTector logs a “130_NO
SIGMATAX SIGNAL” fault and stops.
▪ When Sigmatax Sampler sends an error signal to the BioTector
for longer than 60 seconds, BioTector logs a “131_ SIGMATAX
FAULT” fault and stops.
Page 130
8.3.9 Fault Status
This menu gives a short status history of several system devices before a fault is registered. The default 0.0 values indicate that there
are no faults detected for the specific device.
O2 FLOW
BIOTECTOR TEMPERATURE
CO2 ANALYZER FAULT
OZONE GEN FAULT
COOLER FAULT
▪ The O2 FLOW menu consists of 120 entries for the MFC
setpoint value (first column) and MFC flow value (second
column). The entries are sampled at every 1 second intervals. If
a fault is detected, the events are stored in the O2 FLOW fault
archive and are retained even if the fault is acknowledged in
Fault Archive menu. The archive is only over-written if a new
fault is detected.
▪ The BIOTECTOR TEMPERATURE menu consists of 120
readings of the BioTector temperature. The entries are sampled
at every 2 seconds intervals, covering 240 seconds. If a fault is
detected, the events are stored in the BIOTECTOR
TEMPERATURE fault archive and are retained even if the fault
is accepted in Fault Archive menu. The archive is only overwritten if a new fault is detected.
▪ The CO2 ANALYZER FAULT menu consists of 120 readings of
the CO2 Analyzer. The entries are sampled at every 2 second
intervals, covering 240 seconds. If a fault is detected, the events
are stored in the CO2 ANALYZER FAULT archive and are
retained even if the fault is accepted in Fault Archive menu. The
archive is only over-written if a new fault is detected.
▪ The OZONE GENERATOR FAULT menu consists of 120
readings of the current drawn through the OZONE
GENERATOR. If a fault is detected, the events are stored in the
OZONE GENERATOR FAULT archive and are retained even if
the fault is accepted in Fault Archive menu. The archive is only
over-written if a new fault is detected. By careful analysis of the
fault data, it is possible to determine between an abrupt fault,
and an intermittent fault.
▪ The COOLER FAULT menu consists of 120 readings of the
Cooler. The entries are sampled at every 1 second intervals.
The data in first column displays the current drawn by the Cooler
in Amperes. The data in the second column displays the %
output activation time of the Cooler. For instance, 90% means
that the Cooler is activated for 90% of the Pulse Width
Modulation period. If a fault is detected, the events are stored in
the COOLER FAULT archive and are retained even if the fault is
accepted in the Fault Archive menu. The archive is only overwritten if a new fault is detected.
Page 131
8.3.10
CO2 Analyzer
ANALYSIS GRAPH SCALE
5000ppm
BAUDRATE
9600
CO2 ANALYZER RANGE
10000ppm
CO2 ANALYZER CAL
▪ ANALYSIS GRAPH SCALE (5000ppm by default) determines
the scale of the y-axis “CO2 analyzer’s ppm-CO2 readings” on
the Analysis Graph Screen (see section 2.1.4 Analysis
Graph
Screen for details). This function allows the system to display
CO2 data peaks in optimal resolution on the LCD screen.
▪ The ANALYSIS GRAPH SCALE is independent of the CO2
ANALYZER RANGE described below. Note that, in certain
circumstances, when the displayed CO2 peaks on screen
exceeds the scale of the graph, the CO2 analyzer keeps
measuring and integrating the CO2 readings to obtain the TOC
result, without losing any CO2 data.
▪ BAUDRATE (9600bps by default) specifies the data
communication signaling speed of CO2 Analyzer with the RS232
communication interface.
▪ CO2 ANALYZER RANGE defines the full scale range of the CO2
analyzer installed in the BioTector.
▪ The CO2 ANALYZER CALIBRATION menu allows the user to
change CO2 Analyzer range and the CO2 analyzer zero and
span parameters when necessary. If required, please contact
manufacturer or distributor for details of the procedures.
Page 132
8.3.11
Cooler Program
MODE
T CONTROL
BACKUP PWM DUTY
10%
50% PWM OFFSET
14.0C
50% PWM SLOPE
5.00%/C
T DIFFERENCE
16.0C
▪ MODE defines the operation mode of the Cooler. Cooler
operates automatically with the default TEMPERATURE
CONTROL setting, to achieve the programmed TEMPERATURE
DIFFERENCE below.
▪ When MODE is programmed as PWM “PULSE WIDTH
MODULATION”, the Cooler operates using the BACKUP PWM
DUTY setting below.
▪ BACKUP PULSE WIDTH MODULATION DUTY defines the
operation of the cooler in back-up mode, i.e. when there is a
fault with the Cooler or with the BioTector temperature sensor
(i.e. when system generates 107_COOLER FAULT and/or
108_COOLER FAN FAULT or 113_TEMP SENSOR FAULT
warning events). The default 10% setting means that the Cooler
is activated for 10% of the time and deactivated for 90% of the
time.
▪ The BACKUP PWM DUTY mode is automatically cancelled
when the relevant faults are acknowledged in the Fault Archive
menu.
▪ The 50% PWM OFFSET setting (14°C by default) is the
midpoint offset of the cooler temperature calibration curve, which
is linear. When Cooler operates with PULSE WIDTH
MODULATION at 50%, the Cooler temperature is typically
~14°C below ambient temperature, which is ~25°.
▪ The 50% PWM slope setting (5% per 1°C by default) is the
slope of the cooler temperature calibration curve at midpoint.
When Cooler operates with PULSE WIDTH MODULATION at
50%, the Cooler temperature changes by ~1°C with every 5%
change in PULSE WIDTH MODULATION.
▪ TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (16°C by default) defines the
temperature difference to be achieved between the BioTector
temperature and the Cooler temperature. BioTector temperature
sensor is located on the O2-Controller Board. Cooler
temperature is achieved with the settings described above.
▪ Cooler Temperature = BioTector Temperature –
TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE.
▪ When BioTector detects that the Cooler temperature will drop
below 5°C applying above settings, system automatically
decreases the PULSE WIDTH MODULATION so that the
temperature of the Cooler does not drop below 5°C. This is
carried out to avoid possible freezing of the condensate water,
which could be present inside the Cooler.
Page 133
8.3.12
Ozone Destructor Program
PWM DUTY
PURGE CYCLE MODE
MAN PURGE CYCLE
50%
AUTO
2000, 15, 15
PURGE CYCLE FLOW
48 l/h
AUTO PURGE CYCLE
15 , 15
▪ PULSE WIDTH MODULATION defines the standard operation of
the Ozone Destructor Heater. The default 50% settings mean
that the Ozone Destructor Heater is on for 50% of the time,
which is typically 5 seconds on and 5 seconds off during normal
operation.
▪ When the temperature of the BioTector exceeds 40°C for more
than 2 minutes, system automatically applies a PWM DUTY
setting of 10%, which means that the Ozone Destructor Heater
is on for 10% of the time, which is typically 1 second on and 9
seconds off.
▪ When the temperature of the BioTector is below 15°C for more
than 2 minutes, system automatically applies a PWM DUTY
setting of 100%, which means that the Ozone Destructor Heater
is on all the time. When system automatically changes the
operation of the Ozone Destructor Heater, no system warnings
are generated.
▪ PURGE CYCLE MODE, which is automatically controlled (AUTO
by default), specifies how the purging of the Ozone Destructor is
carried out. In AUTO (Automatic) mode, the Ozone Destructor
heater and the BioTector Cooler are controlled by the PURGE
CYCLE FLOW and AUTO PURGE CYCLE parameters defined
below.
▪ When PURGE CYCLE MODE is OFF, the Ozone Destructor
heater and the Cooler operate normally.
▪ When PURGE CYCLE MODE is programmed as MAN (Manual),
the Ozone Destructor heater and the Cooler operates as
described in MAN PURGE CYCLE below.
▪ When the PURGE CYCLE MODE above is programmed as
MAN above, in MANUAL PURGE CYCLE setting, the first
parameter (2000 by default) defines the number of analysis
cycles the Ozone Destructor and the BioTector Cooler operates
as normal. The second parameter (15 by default) defines the
number of analysis cycles the Ozone Destructor heater is
switched off. The third parameter (15 by default) defines the
number of analysis cycles both the Ozone Destructor heater and
the Cooler are switched off.
▪ When MANUAL PURGE CYCLE is selected, above operation
routine is repeated with the relevant number of programmed
analysis cycles.
▪ This menu item is only displayed, when the PURGE CYCLE
MODE operation mode is selected as MAN above.
▪ When the PURGE CYCLE MODE above is programmed as
AUTO, and if the flow measured during the Flow Test (see
Section 8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test Program for details) is below
the default PURGE CYCLE FLOW setting of 48 l/h, the Ozone
Destructor heater and the Cooler operates as described in
AUTO PURGE CYCLE below.
▪ This menu item is only displayed, when the PURGE CYCLE
MODE operation mode is selected as AUTO above.
▪ When the PURGE CYCLE MODE above is programmed as
AUTO above, in AUTOMATIC PURGE CYCLE setting, the first
parameter (15 by default) defines the number of analysis cycles
the Ozone Destructor heater is switched off. The second
parameter (also 15 by default) defines the number of analysis
cycles both the Ozone Destructor heater and the Cooler are
switched off. The AUTO PURGE CYCLE operation routine is
carried out only once after the Flow Test routine.
▪ This menu item is only displayed, when the PURGE CYCLE
MODE operation mode is selected as AUTO above.
Page 134
8.3.13
Software Update
LOAD FACTORY CONFIG.
SAVE FACTORY CONFIG.
LOAD CONFIG. FROM MMC/SD CARD
SAVE CONFIG. TO MMC/SD CARD
UPDATE SYSTEM SOFTWARE
▪ Each BioTector system contains a configuration which is
installed and protected by system flash memory. When any
modification is carried out in system configuration, LOAD
FACTORY CONFIGURATION function allows the user to revert
back to the original system settings programmed in the factory.
▪ Before any change is carried out in the system configuration, it is
recommended to use the SAVE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
function below.
▪ When SAVE FACTORY CONFIGURATION function is activated,
the system saves the most up to date configuration into system
flash memory. When this function is used successfully, it allows
the user to make necessary modifications in system
configuration and then revert back to the original settings with
the use of LOAD FACTORY CONFIGURATION function above.
▪ Each system contains an external flash memory card (MMC/SD
card), which contains the factory configuration, with the name
“syscnfg.bin” in binary format. When any modification is carried
out in system configuration, LOAD CONFIG. FROM MMC/SD
CARD function can be used and the user can revert back to the
original system settings programmed in factory or on site.
▪ This function is very useful during system software update (see
UPDATE SYSTEM FIRMWARE below), as the new system
configuration can be installed automatically with this function
once the new configuration is available inside the MMC/SD card
(in binary format and with the correct name).
▪ When SAVE CONFIG. TO MMC/SD CARD function is activated,
the system saves the most up to date configuration into the
MMC/SD card. When this function is used successfully, it allows
the user to make necessary modifications in system
configuration and then revert back to the original settings with
the use of LOAD CONFIG. FROM MMC/SD CARD function
above.
▪ UPDATE SYSTEM SOFTWARE function can be used to update
system software on site. If a software update is required, please
contact manufacturer or distributor for details of the system
software update procedures.
Page 135
8.3.14
Password
OPERATION
CALIBRATION
DIAGNOSTICS
COMMISSIONING
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
8.3.15
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANCAIS
8.3.16
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
▪ Password menu allows any number from 1 to 9999 to be set as
passwords for the Operation, Calibration, Diagnostics,
Commissioning and System Configuration menus (levels). When
the setting is 0000 (by default), the password is disabled.
▪ The higher level passwords can be used to access password
protected lower levels. For instance the DIAGNOSTICS
password can be used for access the OPERATION level. The
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION password can be used to access
the password protected OPERATION, CALIBRATION,
DIAGNOSTICS and COMMISSIONING levels.
Language
▪ LANGUAGE menu allows the user to change the language of
the system if it is available in the software.
Hardware Configuration
▪ Hardware Configuration menus are for factory use only.
Page 136
Section 9
Troubleshooting of System Fault, Warning and
Notification Events
9.1
BioTector Fault Event Explanation and Remedial Action
The following fault conditions activate the BioTector stop sequence, set all 4-20mA signals to the FAULT
LEVEL (1mA by default) programmed in the 4-20mA Program menu, and activate the FAULT relay. When the
system fault is rectified, acknowledge the fault by pressing the ENTER key in the Fault Archive menu.
Detailed information on system operation, commissioning & startup, service and Process Tests are available
in the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector. It is recommended to review these documents for
troubleshooting purposes.
If the BioTector LCD Screen is not operating, check the main power switch and confirm the red light on the
switch is ON. Check/replace Fuse 2 on the motherboard.
FAULT
CONDITION
CAUSE/REMEDY
01_LOW O2 FLOW - EX
MFC oxygen flow through the Exhaust
“EX” Valve (MV1) has been below
50% of its setpoint for the time longer
than the “LOW O2 FLOW TIME”
defined in Fault Setup menu.
This fault may be initiated after the
occurrence of warnings 92/94/96/98
HI/LO AIR/O2 PRESSURE.
Various, for example,
air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking
at the Oxygen Controller Status
(O2-CTRL STATUS) menu. It
should be 400mbar (±10mbar) at
20 l/h MFC flow.
Blocked ozone destructor.
Blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty/blocked Exhaust Valve.
Faulty MFC.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
02_LOW O2 FLOW - SO
MFC oxygen flow through the Sample
Out “SO” port (through Reactor Valve,
MV3) has been below 50% of its
setpoint for the time longer than the
“LOW O2 FLOW TIME” defined in
Fault Setup menu.
This fault may be initiated after the
occurrence of warnings 92/94/96/98
HI/LO AIR/O2 PRESSURE.
Various, for example,
air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking
at the Oxygen Controller Status
(O2-CTRL STATUS) menu. It
should be 400mbar (±10mbar) at
20 l/h MFC flow.
Faulty/blocked Reactor Valve
and/or Sample Valve.
Blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty MFC.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
03_HIGH O2 FLOW
MFC oxygen flow through the Exhaust
Valve (MV1) has been above 50% of
its setpoint for the time longer than the
“HIGH O2 FLOW TIME” defined in the
Fault Setup menu.
Faulty MFC.
Check oxygen pressure looking
at the Oxygen Controller Status
(O2-CTRL STATUS) menu. It
should be 400mbar (±10mbar) at
20 l/h MFC flow.
Page 137
04_REACTION ERROR
No TOC (or TC) CO2 peak detected or
the CO2 peak is below the “CO2
LEVEL” for 3 consecutive reactions.
See Section 8.3.6
Reaction
Check for details.
Acid/Base containers are empty.
Acid/Base tube ferrule and fitting
installed incorrectly.
Delivery problem with pumps or
air bubbles in Acid/Base lines.
Acid/Base Pumps are faulty.
Mixer Reactor is not mixing.
Acid/Base reagents are at
incorrect strength.
Run pH Test (see Section 8.1.1.5
pH Test for details).
05_PRESSURE TEST FAIL
MFC flow did not drop below the
“PRESSURE TEST FAULT” level
during the pressure test cycle. See
Section 8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test
Program for details.
Gas/liquid leak in the BioTector.
Valve leaking or not sealing.
Open Reactor Valve, inspect for
dirt/damage.
Check system fittings.
Check Mixer Reactor.
Run Pressure Test (see Section
8.1.1.1 Pressure Test for
details).
06_PRESSURE CHCK FAIL
MFC flow did not drop below the
“PRESSURE CHCK FAULT” level
during the pressure check cycle for 3
consecutive reactions. See Section
8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test Program
for details.
Gas/liquid leak in the BioTector.
Valve leaking or not sealing.
Open Reactor Valve, inspect for
dirt/damage.
Check system fittings.
Check Mixer Reactor.
Run Pressure Test (see Section
8.1.1.1 Pressure Test for
details).
11_CO2 ANALYZER FAULT
Fault in CO2 Analyzer.
Very dirty optics in CO2 Analyzer.
(can also be programmed as a
warning condition)
Check CO2 analyzer’s ppm CO2
response in Simulate menu (see
Section 8.1.2 Simulate for
details).
Open CO2 analyzer and clean the
optics.
Power down and power up the
BioTector.
If problem persists, check
outgoing 24V DC power to CO2
analyzer on Motherboard at wires
N11 and N12.
For further tests, see information
sheet “T019. BioTector CO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting”, which is available in
the MMC/SD card shipped with the
BioTector.
Page 138
12_HIGH CO2 IN O2
High level of CO2 has been detected in
the input oxygen gas.
Go to Simulate menu and read the CO2
analyzer’s CO2 ppm value. If this value
is greater than 250-300ppm, check the
oxygen purity.
Check the quality of oxygen
following the Oxygen Purity Test
procedures in Section 7
Analyzer Commissioning
and Startup.
If the oxygen purity test is
satisfactory, open CO2 analyzer
and clean the optics.
If problem persists, replace the
CO2 Analyzer filters.
If the oxygen purity test is
unsatisfactory, replace the oxygen
concentrator.
18_LIQUID LEAK DET
BioTector’s liquid leak detector is
activated by the four liquid leak
detector points fitted in the BioTector.
First point is in the main analysis
enclosure cabinet, the second point is
in the oxygen concentrator cabinet, the
third point is in the Mixer Reactor and
the fourth point is the reagent pumps.
See figure 2 in Section 4.1.1
Analysis Enclosure for details.
Check for a liquid leak in the
BioTector main cabinet and in the
oxygen concentrator cabinet.
Check for a liquid leak in Mixer
Reactor by unplugging the leak
detector connector on the bottom
of the reactor.
Check for a liquid leak in the acid
and base pumps.
Rectify the leak.
20_NO REAGENTS
BioTector has calculated that the
reagent containers should be empty.
Change reagents, and reset
reagent monitor in Install New
Reagents menu.
Confirm that the reagent
volume/container size input values
are correct in the Reagents
Monitor menu.
If necessary, to readjust the
number of days reagents last, see
Section 8.2.6 Reagents
Monitor for details.
104_MOTHERBOARD
FUSE4
Fuse 4 (for Cooler and Ozone Generator)
is blown on the motherboard. See
Section 5.2.4 System Fuse
Specifications for details.
Check/replace fuse 4 (F4).
Check fuse holder and confirm
that the fuse is snapped in tightly
into the fuse holder.
105_MOTHERBOARD
FUSE5
Fuse 5 (for sample/acid/base pumps, mixer
Check/replace fuse 5 (F5).
Check fuse holder and confirm
that the fuse is snapped in tightly
into the fuse holder.
Go to Simulate menu and activate
each device connected.
(can also be programmed as a
warning or notification condition)
reactor, sample/stream/manual valves,
reactor/exhaust valves, cooler fan, ozone
destructor, ozone generator fan) is blown
on the motherboard. See Section 5.2.4
System Fuse Specifications for
details.
106_MOTHERBOARD
FUSE6
Fuse 6 (which is reserved for future) is
blown on the motherboard. See Section
5.2.4 System Fuse Specifications for
details.
Check/replace fuse 6 (F6).
Check fuse holder and confirm
that the fuse is snapped in tightly
into the fuse holder.
Page 139
109_HI MPU TEMP
Temperature on the Micro Processor
Unit (MPU) has been exceptionally high
and has exceeded 70°C.
Check the filters in the fan and
vent.
Check the operation of the fan.
(Note that at temperatures below
25°C, BioTector automatically
switches the fan off to stabilize system
temperature using its own internal
heat.)
Check ambient temperature,
which should be less than 45°C.
Confirm that the Analyzer is not
exposed to direct sun light.
If the problem is not related to
above, contact the distributor or
the manufacturer.
129_REACTOR PURGE
FAIL
System has detected a possible
blockage or restriction in the reactor,
Reactor Valve (MV3), Sample Valve
(MV4) or associated tubing and fittings.
See Reactor Purge Check and Reactor
Purge Band defined in Pressure/Flow
Test Program menu 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program.
Various, for example,
air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking at
the Oxygen Controller Status (O2CTRL STATUS) menu. It should
be 400mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h
MFC flow.
Blocked reactor.
Faulty/blocked Reactor Valve
and/or Sample Valve.
Blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty MFC.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
130_NO SIGMATAX
SIGNAL
There is a problem with the “sample
ready” signals, sent from the Sigmatax
Sampler to the BioTector. See
Sigmatax Fault Delay in section 8.3.8
Fault Setup for details.
Check Sigmatax Sampler and its
operation referring to Sigmatax
user manual.
Check the optical cable and wiring
between Sigmatax and BioTector.
131_SIGMATAX FAULT
An error signal (fault condition) is sent
from the Sigmatax Sampler to the
BioTector. See Sigmatax Fault Delay in
section 8.3.8
Fault Setup for details.
Check Sigmatax Sampler referring
to Sigmatax user manual.
Rectify and acknowledge the
Sigmatax fault condition.
Page 140
9.2
BioTector Warning Event Explanation and Remedial Action
The following warning conditions do not activate the BioTector stop sequence and leave the 4-20mA signals
un-changed and do not activate the fault relay. When the system warning is rectified, acknowledge the
warning by pressing the ENTER key in the Fault Archive menu.
WARNING
CONDITION
CAUSE/REMEDY
21_CO2 ANL LENS DIRTY
CO2 Analyzer has detected dirt on its
optical system.
Clean the CO2 Analyzer.
Clean the lenses on the CO2
Analyzer.
22_FLOW WARNING – EX
MFC oxygen flow through the Exhaust
“EX” Valve (MV1) has dropped below
the “FLOW WARNING” level defined in
Pressure/Flow Test Program menu
8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test Program
during the Pressure/Flow Test cycle.
Various, for example,
air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking at
the Oxygen Controller Status (O2CTRL STATUS) menu. It should
be 400mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h
MFC flow.
Partially blocked ozone destructor.
Partially blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty/blocked Exhaust Valve.
Faulty MFC.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
23_FLOW WARNING – SO
MFC oxygen flow through the Sample
Out “SO” port (through Reactor Valve,
MV3) has dropped below the “FLOW
WARNING” level defined in
Pressure/Flow Test Program menu
8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test Program
during the Pressure/Flow Test cycle.
Various, for example,
air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking at
the Oxygen Controller Status (O2CTRL STATUS) menu. It should
be 400mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h
MFC flow.
Faulty/blocked Reactor Valve
and/or Sample Valve.
Partially blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty MFC.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
26_PRESSURE TEST
WARN
MFC flow did not drop below the
“PRESSURE TEST WARNING” level
defined in Pressure/Flow Test Program
menu 8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test
Program during the Pressure/Flow Test
cycle.
Small gas/liquid leak in the
BioTector.
Valve leaking or not sealing.
Open Reactor Valve, inspect for
dirt/damage.
Check system fittings.
Check Mixer Reactor.
Run Pressure Test (see Section
8.1.1.1 Pressure Test for details).
28_NO PRESSURE TEST
This warning is logged when the
pressure test procedure is skipped
during the system startup sequence.
The warning cannot be acknowledged
by the user. It can only be
acknowledged automatically by the
system next time the pressure test is
passed.
This warning occurs when the
Pressure/Flow Test is deactivated,
and when the “QUICK STARTUP”
function is used. See Section
2.2.1 Start Stop for details.
Page 141
29_PRESSURE TEST OFF
There are two pressure tests carried
out in BioTector. One is a daily
pressure test and the other, called
pressure check, is carried out every
analysis cycle. This function relates to
the daily pressure test. Pressure/Flow
Test cycle has been switched off. See
Section 8.3.4.5 Pressure/Flow Test
Program for details.
Activate the Pressure/Flow Test
cycle by programming the factory
flow settings in Pressure/Flow
Test Program menu.
30_TOC/TC SPAN CAL FAIL
31_TIC SPAN CAL FAIL
TOC/TC/TIC Span Calibration result is
outside the specified TOC/TC/TIC
BAND defined in Span Program menu.
See Section 8.3.4.3
Span Program
for details.
Check the concentration of the
standard solution used.
Check the settings in Span
Calibration menu.
Check the operation of the
BioTector.
33_TOC/TC SPAN CHCK
FAIL
34_TIC SPAN CHCK FAIL
TOC/TC/TIC Span Check result is
outside the specified TOC/TC/TIC
BAND defined in Span Program menu.
See Section 8.3.4.3
Span Program
for details.
Check the concentration of the
standard solution used.
Check the settings in Span
Calibration menu.
Check the operation of the
BioTector.
42_ZERO CAL FAIL
Zero Calibration result is outside the
specified ZERO BAND defined in Zero
Program menu. See Section 8.3.4.2
Zero Program for details.
Check the stability of the zero
reactions and the quality of the
reagents used.
Check the settings in Zero
Program menu.
Repeat the zero calibration cycle.
43_ZERO CHCK FAIL
Zero Check result is outside the
specified ZERO BAND defined in Zero
Program menu. See Section 8.3.4.2
Zero Program for details.
Check the stability of the zero
reactions and the quality of the
reagents used.
Check the settings in Zero
Program menu.
Repeat the zero calibration cycle.
50_TIC OVERFLOW
High TIC reading at the end of the TIC
phase, even though the TIC sparge
time has been automatically extended
to its maximum time of 300s. See
Section 8.3.6 Reaction Check for
details.
Exceptionally high TIC.
Check system operation ranges in
System Range Data menu.
Increase operation range to
reduce injected sample volume.
Increase the TIC SPARGE TIME
in System Program, System
Program 1 menu.
51_TOC OVERFLOW
High TOC readings at the end of TOC
phase, even though the TOC time has
been automatically extended to its
maximum time of 300s. See Section
8.3.6 Reaction Check for details.
Exceptionally high TOC.
Check system operation ranges in
System Range Data menu.
Increase operation range to
reduce injected sample volume.
Increase the TOC SPARGE TIME
in System Program, System
Program 1 menu.
System factory configuration settings
are available in the MMC/SD card
shipped with the BioTector.
Page 142
52_HIGH CO2 IN BASE
CO2 level in the base reagent, which is
checked during the Zero Calibration or
Zero Check cycles, is higher than the
“BASE CO2 ALARM” level
programmed in Fault Setup menu.
Confirm the base reagent CO2
filter is serviced and in good
condition, and the container is
sealed.
Check reagent quality.
Replace the base reagent.
62_SMPL PUMP STOP ON
Sample Pump stopped with its rotation
sensor ON or the sensor is faulty and it
is always showing ON.
Run the Sample Pump and check
the rotation.
Check pump sensor signal looking
at DI15 in Digital Input menu.
Replace the pump.
63_SMPL PUMP STOP OFF
Sample Pump stopped with its rotation
sensor OFF or the sensor is faulty and
it is not sensing the rotation of the
pump.
Run the Sample Pump and check
the rotation.
Check pump sensor signal looking
at DI15 in Digital Input menu.
Replace the pump.
81_ATM PRESSURE HIGH
System atmospheric pressure sensor
reading is above 115kPa. Therefore,
the sensor reading is defaulted to
101.3kPa fault operation mode.
Check ADC[05] in Analog Input
menu, which should be ~4 Volts.
Faulty pressure sensor.
Replace the motherboard.
82_ATM PRESSURE LOW
System atmospheric pressure sensor
reading is below 60kPa. Therefore, the
sensor reading is defaulted to
101.3kPa fault operation mode.
Check ADC[05] in Analog Input
menu, which should be ~4 Volts.
Faulty pressure sensor.
Replace the motherboard.
83_SERVICE TIME
The service counter has counted down
the days between service intervals and
indicates that service is required.
Service the BioTector.
After service, acknowledge the
warning by resetting the counter
using the “RESET SERVICE
COUNTER” function in
Diagnostics, Service menu.
84_SAMPLER ERROR
Warning generated on the BioTector
venturi/vacuum sampler due to no/low
sample or low air pressure/vacuum in
the sampler.
Check the LCD screen of the
venturi/vacuum sampler for
details.
See BioTector venturi/vacuum
sampler user manual.
88_O2 CONTROLLER
WARN
A problem has been found during
communication with the O2-Controller
Board.
The communication between the O2Controller Board and the Motherboard
is lost.
Check LED 2 (L2) on the O2Controller Board, it should be on.
Check the 24V DC power on the
O2-Controller Board at terminals
N01 and N02.
Check the data cable (ribbon
cable) connections on the board.
Power down and power up the
BioTector to reset the system.
Replace the board.
Page 143
89_TC SPAN CAL FAIL
90_TC SPAN CHCK FAIL
TC Span Calibration/Check result is
outside the specified TC BAND defined
in Span Program menu. See Section
8.3.4.3 Span Program for details.
Check the concentration of the
standard solution used.
Check the settings in Span
Calibration menu.
Check the operation of the
BioTector.
91_TC OVERFLOW
High TC readings at the end of TC
phase, even though the TC time has
been automatically extended to its
maximum time of 300s. See Section
8.3.6 Reaction Check for details.
Exceptionally high TC.
Check system operation ranges in
System Range Data menu.
Increase operation range to
reduce injected sample volume.
Increase the TC SPARGE TIME in
System Program, System
Program 1 menu.
92_HI AIR PRESSURE 2
Air pressure supply has been more
than 2.0 bar for longer than 5 seconds.
When the oxygen concentrator is
running, the pressure typically cycles
from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar.
If system does not detect the air
pressure drop to normal levels, the air
supply is isolated from the system and
oxygen is not generated.
Extreme fluctuations in air supply
pressure or faulty external air
regulator.
Reduce the external air supply
pressure to 1.5 bar when the
oxygen concentrator is not
running.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
93_HI AIR PRESSURE 1
Air pressure supply has been more
than 1.8 bar for longer than 60
seconds.
When the oxygen concentrator is
running, the pressure typically cycles
from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar.
Extreme fluctuations in air supply
pressure or faulty external air
regulator.
Stop the BioTector and reduce the
external air supply pressure to 1.5
bar when the oxygen concentrator
is not running.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
94_LO AIR PRESSURE 2
Air pressure supply has been less than
0.6 bar for longer than 5 seconds.
When the oxygen concentrator is
running, the pressure typically cycles
from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar.
If system does not detect the air
pressure increase to normal levels, the
air supply is isolated from the system
and oxygen is not generated.
Extreme fluctuations in air supply
pressure or faulty external air
regulator.
Increase air supply pressure to
1.5 bar when the oxygen
concentrator is not running.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
Page 144
95_LO AIR PRESSURE 1
Air pressure supply has been less than
0.8 bar for longer than 60 seconds.
When the oxygen concentrator is
running, the pressure typically cycles
from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar.
Extreme fluctuations in air supply
pressure or faulty external air
regulator.
Increase air supply pressure to
1.5 bar when the oxygen
concentrator is not running.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
96_HI O2 PRESSURE 2
Oxygen pressure supply has been
more than 500 mbar for longer than 5
seconds.
If system does not detect the oxygen
pressure drop to normal levels, the air
supply is isolated from the system and
oxygen is not generated.
Reduce oxygen pressure to 400
mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h MFC
flow, looking at the Oxygen
Controller Status (O2-CTRL
STATUS) menu and using the
oxygen pressure regulator.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
97_HI O2 PRESSURE 1
Oxygen pressure supply has been
more than 450 mbar for longer than 60
seconds.
Reduce oxygen pressure to 400
mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h MFC
flow, looking at the Oxygen
Controller Status (O2-CTRL
STATUS) menu and using the
oxygen pressure regulator.
98_LO O2 PRESSURE 2
Oxygen pressure supply has been less
than 150 mbar for longer than 5
seconds.
If system does not detect the oxygen
pressure increase to normal levels, the
air supply is isolated from the system
and oxygen is not generated.
Increase oxygen pressure to 400
mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h MFC
flow, looking at the Oxygen
Controller Status (O2-CTRL
STATUS) menu and using the
oxygen pressure regulator.
When the problem is rectified,
acknowledge the warning by
pressing the ENTER key in the
Fault Archive menu, to reset the
O2-Controller Board.
99_LO O2 PRESSURE 1
Oxygen pressure supply has been less
than 200 mbar for longer than 60
seconds.
Increase oxygen pressure to 400
mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h MFC
flow, looking at the Oxygen
Controller Status (O2-CTRL
STATUS) menu and using the
oxygen pressure regulator.
Page 145
100_ROTARY V STOP:ON
Rotary Valve stopped with its rotation
sensor on (sensor signal 1).
The sensor is faulty and it is always
showing on (sensor signal 1).
See Rotary Valve and Rotary Valve
Sensor in Section 8.1.6 Oxygen
Controller Status for details.
Go to Simulate menu, set MFC
flow to 20 l/h and check the
rotation of the Rotary Valve.
Check ROTARY VALVE SENSOR
signals (1 “on” and 0 “off”) in the
Oxygen Controller Status menu as
the valve rotates.
Replace the valve.
When the warning is cleared, the
green LED, labeled as “Stepper”
on the Oxygen Controller Board,
should be on.
101_ROTARY V STOP:OFF
Rotary Valve stopped with its rotation
sensor off (sensor signal 0).
The sensor is faulty and it is not
sensing the rotation of the pump.
Sensor in Section 8.1.6 Oxygen
Controller Status for details.
Go to Simulate menu, set MFC
flow to 20 l/h and check the
rotation of the Rotary Valve.
Check ROTARY VALVE SENSOR
signals (1 “on” and 0 “off”) in the
Oxygen Controller Status menu as
the valve rotates.
Replace the valve.
When the warning is cleared, the
green LED, labeled as “Stepper”
on the Oxygen Controller Board,
should be on.
102_OZONE GEN FAULT
The current drawn through the Ozone
Generator has dropped below 0.5 Amp
for longer than 5 seconds. Fuse 4 (for
Cooler and Ozone Generator) is blown on
the motherboard. See Section 5.2.4
System Fuse Specifications for
details.
Check/replace the fuse 4 (F4) on
the motherboard.
Check fuse holder and confirm
that the fuse is snapped in tightly
into the fuse holder.
Press the “RESET” button on the
motherboard.
Power off the BioTector, wait 30
seconds and power up.
Go to Simulate menu, turn the
OZONE GENERATOR on and
adjust Ozone Current to 0.9 Amp
(±0.05 Amp) using the
potentiometer on the Ozone
Generator box.
103_OZONE FAN FAULT
If this optional device is fitted, the
voltage on the Ozone Generator Fan
has dropped below 1.5 Volts or has
exceeded 3.5 Volts for longer than 5
seconds.
Check the operation of the fan
inside the Ozone Generator.
Check wiring on terminals N01
and N03 on the Ozone Generator
Board.
Page 146
107_COOLER FAULT
The current drawn through the Cooler
has dropped below 0.1 Amp for longer
than 5 seconds. This indicates cooler
peltier element failure.
Fuse 3 (for Cooler) is blown on the
motherboard. See Section 5.2.4
System Fuse Specifications for
details.
Check fuse 3 (F3) on the
motherboard.
Check fuse holder and confirm
that the fuse is snapped in tightly
into the fuse holder.
Inspect the Cooler wiring on the
green terminal block.
Check the wiring between the
Cooler and the Termination Board
81204370_01.
Go to Simulate menu and set
COOLER to 100%, the voltage on
the peltier element of the Cooler
should be 10 Volts.
Replace the Peltier Element and
the Cooler Fan.
108_COOLER FAN FAULT
The monitoring voltage on the Cooler
Fan has dropped below 1.5 Volts or
has exceeded 3.5 Volts for longer than
5 seconds.
Check the wiring between the
Cooler Fan and the Termination
Board 81204370_01.
Measure the voltage on the
Cooler Fan on the green terminal
block, it should be 24 Volts.
Replace the Cooler Fan.
110_HI TEMP DUTYCYCLE
BioTector temperature has exceeded
50°C for longer than 2 minutes.
An analysis delay time of 300 seconds
has been introduced between each
analysis cycle.
When system temperature drops below
48°C for longer than 2 minutes,
BioTector continues normal operation.
Check the filters in the fan and
vent.
Check the operation of the fan.
BioTector temperature has exceeded
55°C for longer than 2 minutes.
BioTector has been automatically put
into standby mode and has stopped
analyzing.
When the temperature drops below
50°C for longer than 2 minutes,
BioTector continues operation as
described for “110_HI TEMP
DUTYCYCLE” above. When system
temperature drops below 48°C for
longer than 2 minutes, BioTector
continues normal operation.
Check the filters in the fan and
vent.
Check the operation of the fan.
111_HI TEMP STANDBY
(Note that at temperatures below
25°C, BioTector automatically
switches the fan off to stabilize system
temperature using its own internal
heat.)
Check ambient temperature,
which should be less than 45°C.
Confirm that the Analyzer is not
exposed to direct sun light.
If the problem is not related to
above, contact the distributor or
the manufacturer.
(Note that at temperatures below
25°C, BioTector automatically
switches the fan off to stabilize system
temperature using its own internal
heat.)
Check ambient temperature,
which should be less than 45°C.
Confirm that the Analyzer is not
exposed to direct sun light.
If the problem is not related to
above, contact the distributor or
the manufacturer.
Page 147
112_LO TEMP STANDBY
BioTector temperature has dropped
below 2°C for longer than 2 minutes.
BioTector has been automatically put
into standby mode and has stopped
analyzing.
When BioTector temperature increases
above 5°C for longer than 2 minutes,
BioTector continues normal operation.
Check ambient and BioTector
temperature.
Confirm BioTector is operating
within its specification
temperatures (5°C – 45°C).
113_TEMP SENSOR FAULT
The difference between the
temperature readings recorded by
Micro Processor Unit (MPU)
temperature sensor (located on the
Motherboard) and the BioTector
temperature sensor (located on the O2Controller Board) has been outside the
±15°C temperature band.
Confirm that motherboard cover is
installed and the door of the
analyzer is closed.
Check ambient temperature,
which should be less than 45°C.
Confirm that the Analyzer is not
exposed to direct sun light.
If the problem is not related to
above, contact the distributor or
the manufacturer.
114_I/O WARNING
System has detected changes in the
Input/Output bus extender chips, which
have read/write control registers, during
the periodic checks carried out
automatically.
When system detects a
discrepancy between the
requested and the read
configuration registers values,
then all devices on SPI “Serial
Peripheral Interface” bus are reset
and re-initialized automatically.
Acknowledge the warning and
inform the distributor or the
manufacturer.
115_CO2 ANALYZER
WARN
Fault in CO2 Analyzer.
Very dirty optics in CO2 Analyzer.
Check CO2 analyzer’s ppm CO2
response in Simulate menu (see
Section 8.1.2 Simulate for
details).
Open CO2 analyzer and clean the
optics.
Power down and power up the
BioTector.
If problem persists, check
outgoing 24V DC power to CO2
analyzer on Motherboard at wires
N11 and N12.
For further tests, see information
sheet “T019. BioTector CO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting”, which is available in
the MMC/SD card shipped with the
BioTector.
Page 148
128_REACTOR PURGE
WARN
System has detected irregularities in
the gas flow, which indicates a possible
blockage or restriction in the reactor,
Reactor Valve (MV3), Sample Valve
(MV4) or associated tubing and fittings.
See Reactor Purge Check and Reactor
Purge Band defined in Pressure/Flow
Test Program menu 8.3.4.5
Pressure/Flow Test Program.
Various, for example, partially
blocked reactor.
Faulty/blocked Reactor Valve
and/or Sample Valve.
Partially blocked tube after MFC.
Faulty MFC.
Air and oxygen supply problem.
Check oxygen pressure looking at
the Oxygen Controller Status (O2CTRL STATUS) menu. It should
be 400mbar (±10mbar) at 20 l/h
MFC flow.
Run Flow Test (see Section
8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
Page 149
9.3
BioTector Notification Event Explanation and Remedial Action
The following Notification conditions do not activate the BioTector stop sequence, leave the 4-20mA signal
un-changed and do not activate the fault relay. Relevant notifications below can be acknowledged in the Fault
Archive menu.
NOTIFICATION
CONDITION
CAUSE/REMEDY
85_REAGENTS LOW
BioTector has calculated that the
reagent containers are running low.
Change reagents, and reset
reagent monitor in Install New
Reagents menu.
Confirm that the reagent
volume/container size input values
are correct in the Reagents
Monitor menu.
If necessary, to readjust the
number of days reagents last, see
Section 8.2.6 Reagents
Monitor for details.
86_POWER UP
Power applied to the BioTector or
system reboot after the processor
watchdog timeout.
Automatically acknowledged
notification.
No action is required.
87_SERVICE TIME RESET
This message is logged into the fault
archives when “RESET SERVICE
COUNTER” function is selected in
Diagnostics, Service menu.
Automatically acknowledged
notification.
No action is required.
116/117/118_ LOW/NO
SAMPLE 1/2/3
This message is logged into the fault
archives when BioTector Sample
Sensor detects no sample liquid or
when the sample quality is less than
the default threshold value for the
corresponding streams from stream 1
to stream 3. See Section 8.3.8 Fault
Setup for details.
Check sample liquid level and
sampling system for each sample
channel.
Go to Sample Pump Test menu
and run PUMP FORWARD TEST
and check sample delivery and
sample bypass.
Confirm that no air bubbles are
getting introduced into the sample
lines.
122/123/124_ SAMPLE
FAULT 1/2/3
This message is logged into the fault
archives when external device sends a
stream specific sample fault input
signal to the BioTector.
See Section 8.3.8
Fault Setup for
details.
Check the external sample liquid
level and sampling system for
each sample channel.
Check the external sample
monitoring device and the external
input signal wiring.
(can also be programmed as a
warning condition)
Page 150
Section 10
Service and Maintenance
10.1 Weekly Maintenance
▪
Check the air supply pressure:
A) An existing instrument air supply line
B) BioTector Compressor
▪
▪
Check and confirm that the air pressure is 1.5 bar on the filter pack pressure regulator.
Check the Sulfuric Acid level in the acid reagent container. Check the Acid Pump and confirm that
there are no leaks.
Check the Sodium Hydroxide (base) level in the base reagent container.
If installed check the sampling system:
Option 1: Confirm that the BioTector Vacuum Sampler or BioTector Venturi Sampler is
operating
Option 2: Confirm that the Sample Catch-Pot has sufficient sample flow, which guarantees a
fresh sample for each analysis cycle.
Option 3: Confirm that the Sample Pipe has sufficient sample flow, which guarantees a fresh
sample for each analysis cycle.
Check the Sample Pump and confirm that there are no leaks. Observe Sample Pump operation and
sample delivery from the sample point and confirm that there are no blockages inside sample lines.
Check all valves inside the BioTector and confirm that there are no leaks.
Check the filter mats in the Fan and Vent housings and confirm that they are not blocked.
Check the Sample Out and Exhaust lines outside the BioTector and confirm that there are no
damages and blockages.
▪
▪
▪
▪
▪
▪
Page 151
10.2 Six Month Service
Below procedure is a recommended check list for the 6th month service on the BioTector using the 6 Month
Service Kit. Please note that any special models and applications may require additional service items.
Service procedures may be changed without notice due to the continuous research and development
program. Therefore, please refer to the service check list supplied with the service kit for most up to date
information.
Detailed service procedures are available in a presentation format in the MMC/SD card shipped with the
BioTector. It is recommended to review this document before starting the service procedures.
Service should only be carried out when “SYSTEM STOPPED” message is displayed on the top left
corner of the main Analysis Data screen or when the system is powered down. When “REMOTE
STANDBY” or “SYSTEM RUNNING” message is displayed on the screen, stop the BioTector using the
“Finish & Stop” or “Emergency Stop” function.
For system and personal safety, all reagent lines should be washed with water and then purged with air
before the service procedures are carried out. In order to wash the reagent lines, connect all reagent dip
tubes to a DIW (or tap water) container. Go to Zero Calibration menu and activate “RUN REAGENT
PURGE” function to wash the reagent lines with water (see Section 2.3.1
Zero
Calibration
for
details). When the reagent purge with water is completed, remove the tubes from the water container
and place them open to air. Using the same menu, select the “RUN REAGENT PURGE” function one
more time to purge the reagent lines with air. As the system may still contain small traces of reagents
after the reagent purge cycles, it is strongly recommended to take the necessary safety precautions,
such as wearing eye protection and gloves throughout the service. (If the reagents lines do not fill with DIW
during the Reagents Purge cycle, raise the DIW container above the height of the BioTector, go to Zero Calibration
menu and select the RUN REAGENTS PURGE function again.)
Disconnect power to ozone destructor heater. The ozone destructor should never be opened
when it is hot as the threads may seize.
_____
Replace the 6.4mm OD, 3.2mm ID EMPP 562 tubing used in the Sample Valve (see item C1
in the service kit).
_____
Check the rollers on the rotor of the WMM60 Sample Pump manually and confirm that they
are rotating freely.
_____
Replace the tubing (6.4mm OD, 3.2mm ID EMPP 562 tubes) of the WMM60 Sample Pump.
The WMM60 replacement tubes are supplied in the service kits (see item C2 in the service
kit). The overall length of the tube is 156.5mm. If process conditions require this tube to be
changed every 3 months, an additional tube is supplied in the service kit.
_____
Replace the 6.4mm OD, 3.2mm ID EMPP 562 tubing used in the pinch valves (see item C1
in the service kit) and any PP (Poly-Propylene) Y fittings (see item C3 in the service kit) in the
analyzer. If additional Y fittings are required they should be ordered separately.
_____
Disconnect the PFA fitting above the cooler. Remove the three nuts and open the analysis door. Using
the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2
Simulate for details) and referring to figure 1, figure 2 and
table 2 in Section 4.1.1
Analysis Enclosure, check and confirm that the valves are operating and
there are no leaks:
Check Sample Valve, MV4.
_____
Check Reactor Valve, MV3 operation. When the valve is activated, the LED on the valve
should be on.
_____
Check Exhaust Valve, MV1. When the valve is activated, the LED on the valve should be on.
_____
Check all the other valves (e.g. multi-stream valves) if installed in the BioTector.
_____
Check and confirm that MANUAL/CALIBRATION ports are not blocked or isolated.
_____
Page 152
Check for possible build-up of salts or any material at any of the PFA T fittings located
between the Ozone Generator and the Mixer Reactor. Clean the fittings and/or the tubing if
necessary.
_____
Remove Ozone Line Filter and wash it with DIW (or tap water). Dry the filter well and reinstall
in place. See figure 1, table 2 in Section 4.1.1 Analysis Enclosure and figure 4 in Section
4.2.2
BioTector Sample Injection for details.
_____
Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2 Simulate for details) and a 10ml graduated cylinder, check
and confirm that the pumps are pumping correctly.
Acid Pump rate for FMM20 Pump at 400 pulses should be between 3.80 ml and 4.20 ml.
(Depending on the quantity of the liquid injected into the reactor and due to an internal system interlock,
the system may request the activation of Reactor Purge cycle to purge any excess liquid from the
reactor. If necessary run “REACTOR PURGE” function in the Simulate menu.)
_____
Base Pump rate for FMM20 Pump at 400 pulses should be between 3.80 ml and 4.20 ml.
_____
Important Note: For the correct operation of the system, the measured Acid and Base Pump rates must
be identical or similar. The maximum allowable difference in the measured volumes for acid and base
injections above should not be more than 0.2ml.
Sample Pump rate for WMM60 Pump at 16 pulses should be between 5.5ml and 7.5ml in ~8
seconds. (Any variation between these pumped volumes is corrected when the zero and span
_____
calibration is carried out.)
Replace the 100mm filter mats in fan and vent housing (see item C4 in the service kit.)
Check the operation of the fan. (Note that at temperatures below 25°C, BioTector automatically
switches the fan off to stabilize system temperature using its own internal heat.)
Clean CO2 analyzer optics by removing the 4x M4x60 Allen bolts on the detector section. If
necessary, clean both lenses, which are located on the detector and the source section of
the CO2 Analyzer using the Lens Tissue (see item C5 in the service kits). Replace O-ring with
the 72-0325-30 O-ring provided (see item C6 in the service kit).
Oxygen Purity Test: Power up the system for at least 10 minutes before the oxygen purity
test is carried out. Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2
Simulate) set the MFC
(see figure 2 and table 2 in Section 4.1.1
Analysis Enclosure) flow to 10 l/h and flow
oxygen gas through the CO2 analyzer for 5 minutes. At the end of this period, the CO 2
analyzer zero reading (ppm CO2) should be within ±0.5% of full scale of the CO2 analyzer
range. For instance, if the CO2 analyzer range is 10000ppm, then the CO2 analyzer zero
reading should be typically within ±50ppm. Go to CO2 Analyzer menu (see section 8.3.10
CO2 Analyzer) to view the CO2 Analyzer Range.
_____
_____
_____
_____
(If the CO2 analyzer zero reading is outside the specifications, confirm that there is no CO 2 in the
oxygen gas by connecting the CO2 filter “used with the base container” between the Cooler and CO2
analyzer inlet port and set the MFC to 10 l/h. As the size of the CO2 filter is small, keep the 10 l/h gas
flow running for at least for 5 minutes and record the CO2 zero readings at the end of the 5 minute
period. If the CO2 zero readings do not drop significantly with the CO 2 filter in place, this will indicate
that there is no CO2 contamination in the oxygen supply.)
Page 153
Warning! A Torque Screwdriver with 3mm Allen bit, calibrated to 1.5 Nm (150 Ncm), is
required for the correct service of the Mixer Reactor. It is strongly recommended not to
proceed with the Mixer Reactor service procedures without a torque screwdriver. An
adjustable torque screwdriver can be obtained from a local supplier. Example specifications
and suppliers of the torque screwdriver are as follows:
Lindstrom adjustable torque driver, 40-200Ncm
Stanley Supply & Services, Inc.
http://www.stanleysupplyservices.com/product-detail.aspx?pn=419-704
RS Components Ltd.
http://uk.rs-online.com/web/p/torque-drivers/3851794/
Loosen each bolt, located on the front of the Mixer Reactor, with small steps, moving from
one bolt to another across. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the reactor motor, which
contains the diaphragm, located at the back. Hold the reactor diaphragm carefully using both
hands and turn the diaphragm anti-clockwise to unscrew. It is recommended to count the
number of turns by putting a small mark on the diaphragm during this process. Using both
hands screw in the new diaphragm (see item C7 in the service kit) and tighten it firmly. The
typical minimum number of turns to tighten the diaphragm is from 7 to 8.5 turns. If a minimum
number of 7 turns, or the number of turns counted above when the old diaphragm was
removed, is not achieved, the diaphragm must be removed and reinstalled. Push the edge of
the diaphragm down firmly into place. When the installation of the diaphragm is complete,
confirm that the diaphragm forms a “concave” shape at the center. In other words, when the
diaphragm is installed correctly, the diaphragm should curve in forming a dent at the center.
If such dent has not formed, unscrew the diaphragm, confirm that the diaphragm is installed
correctly and if necessary tighten the diaphragm more with additional turns. Confirm that the
sealing face at the back of the reactor, where the diaphragm sits, is clean. Install the reactor
motor back onto the Mixer Reactor and tighten each bolt by engaging the threads and
stopping as soon as the threads are just engaged. Tighten each bolt, with small steps,
moving from one bolt to another across. Tighten the bolts using the 3mm washers under
each bolt. The torque of the screws should not exceed 1.5 Nm (150 Ncm).
_____
Confirm that the temperature of the ozone destructor has dropped to ambient temperature
level. Open the ozone destructor. The ozone destructor should never be opened when it is
hot as the threads may seize. Confirm that the PTFE filters (discs) in the ozone destructor
are clean. If there is any material build up (e.g. white powder), wash the filters using DIW (or
tap water) and dry. Do not use compressed air or any gas to clean the filters.
_____
Replace the catalyst and PTFE wool in the ozone destructor (see item C8 in the service kit).
_____
Replace the o-ring in the Ozone Destructor (see item C6 in the service kit).
_____
Reconnect power to ozone destructor heater.
_____
Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2 Simulate for details) and referring to figure 1
and table 2 in Section 4.1.1 Analysis Enclosure, activate OZONE GENERATOR and
confirm that the Ozone Generator is working and current displayed on screen is 0.9 Amp
(±0.05 Amp). If necessary adjust the current using the Ozone Generator Current Adjustment
Potentiometer located on the Ozone Generator.
_____
Remove the tapes, which are used to seal the ends of the supplied CO 2 filter (see item C9 in
the service kit). Replace the CO2 filter on the Base reagent container. Seal the Base
container tightly.
_____
Isolate the air supply to the analyzer. Go to Simulate menu and set MFC to 60 l/h and run the
oxygen supply until the flow drops to 0 l/h (until the oxygen tank is empty). Install the new
Hepa Filter (see item C10 in the service kit) carefully without contaminating the open tubing.
Turn the air supply on.
_____
Page 154
Check the air supply pressure. The set point pressure should be 1.5 bar (BioTector
compressor 1.2 bar). When the oxygen concentrator is running, the pressure typically cycles
from 1.5 bar to 0.9 bar. Check the O2 PRESSURE SENSOR reading looking at the O2Controller Status menu. The pressure should be 400 mbar (±10 mbar) at 20 l/h MFC flow.
See Section 8.1.6
Oxygen Controller Status for details.
_____
Using the Simulate menu (see Section 8.1.2 Simulate for details), check the operation of the
Mass Flow Controller (MFC) and confirm that the MFC is working at various flow set points.
_____
Check the BioTector for any gas/liquid leaks by running the PRESSURE TEST cycle using
the Process Test menu (see Section 8.1.1.1 Pressure Test for details). Check the gas flow
in the system by running the EXHAUST TEST and SAMPLE OUT TEST in Process Test,
Flow Test menu (see Section 8.1.1.2 Flow Test for details).
_____
Confirm all signals (4-20mA and volt free contacts) are signaling correctly to the external
control device.
_____
If necessary, go to Operation, Time & Date menu and adjust the time and the date. When the
system service is completed, go to Diagnostics, Service menu and select RESET SERVICE
COUNTER function (see Section 8.1.7
Service for details).
_____
Carry out an “Install New Reagents” cycle using the Install New Reagents menu (see Section
2.2.2.1
Install New Reagents for details). Confirm that the zero readings obtained
during the Zero Calibration cycle are stable.
(If the reagent lines do not fill during the Install New Reagents cycle, stop the BioTector to prime the
pumps manually. Remove the dip tubes from the reagent containers, and seal the containers. Place the
dip tubes into a small container containing DIW. If DIW is not available use tap water. Raise the
container above the height of the BioTector. Go to Zero Calibration menu and select RUN REAGENTS
PURGE function to prime the pumps. Once the pumps have been primed, reinstall the dip tubes into
the reagent containers and repeat the Install New Reagents cycle.)
When the Mixer Reactor is serviced, there is a possibility of contamination, which may create
an unacceptable TOC offset. If the TOC readings obtained during the zero calibration cycle
are higher than expected, a service zero calibration cycle can be initiated using the SET
SERVICE ZERO function in Service menu, while the BioTector is running. When initiated,
BioTector automatically runs a total of 5 zero calibration cycles during the following 100
online measurements and automatically adjusts the zero offset values to compensate for the
removal of the contamination. It will therefore not be necessary to revisit the BioTector after
the service or to repeat the zero calibration cycle. See Section 8.1.7 Service for further
details.
Program the concentration of the standard solution in the Span Calibration menu (2.3.2
Span Calibration). The concentration of the calibration standard used must be typically
greater than 50% of the full scale of the RANGE the calibration is carried out. In order to see
BioTector calibrated ranges, see System Range Data screen (2.2.3 System Range Data
Screen). (To prepare a standard solution, see procedures described in Section 6.2 Calibration
_____
_____
_____
Standards or information sheet “R009. Standard Solutions for BioTector Multi-component Analyzer”,
which is available inside the MMC/SD card shipped with the BioTector.)
Connect the standard solution to the MANUAL/CALIBRATION port. If these ports are not
available, use the SAMPLE 1 port. It is recommended that the standard solution is located at
the same height as the sample chamber. The tubing length between the standard solution
and the BioTector MANUAL/CALIBRATION port should be between 2 and 2.5 meters. Run
the Span Calibration cycle using the RUN SPAN CALIBRATION function in Span Calibration
menu. A minimum of five complete analysis cycles is recommended for the span calibration.
Span Calibration cycle should be carried out only when stable zero readings are obtained
after a Zero Calibration cycle completed without any warnings. ( In systems using multiple
_____
operation ranges, it is recommended to carry out a Span Check cycle at the other operation ranges
used and if necessary to adjust the span factor manually using the Span Calibration menu.)
Page 155
Section 11
System Replacement and Spare Parts
Page 156
BioTector Parts and Spare Parts
Part Number and
Description
10-DVB-013
Part Number and
Description
19-PCB-050
B5C Motherboard
Oxygen Concentrator
Sieve Beds (set of 2)
19-PCB-051
B3500 Mainboard with
Ex-i Battery for IECEx &
ATEX Zone 1 systems
20-B5C-013
20-PCB-036
B5C PSU Module
B5C Oxygen Controller
Board
20-PCB-038
19-MAX-008
B5C Termination
Board
B5C Sample Pump
20-B5C-019
20-B5C-020
B5C Acid Pump
B5C Base Pump
10-KNF-038
19-B5C-024
NF300 PTFE
Diaphragm
B5C Mixer Reactor
Motor, 24V DC
19-B5C-023
19-B5C-009
B5C Mixer Reactor
complete with 24V DC
Motor
B5C Mixer Reactor
Page 157
Part Number and
Description
Part Number and
Description
19-B5C-014
19-B5C-015
B5C Type 6606
N/O Valve
B5C Type 6606
N/C Valve
19-B5C-016
19-B5C-017
B5C Pinch Valve
N/O
B5C Pinch Valve
C/O
20-B5C-011
20-CO2-008
B5C Oxygen
Concentrator
Rotary Valve
B5C CO2 Analyzer
20-B5C-025
19-PCB-034
B5C Ozone
Generator Module
B5C Ozone Board
10-SMC-001
12-SMC-001
B5C Instrument Air
Filter Pack
B5C Instrument Air
Filter Pack
Elements
19-KIT-123
19-B5C-026
B5C 6 Month
Service Kit
B5C Cooler Kit
19-BS5-001
19-BS5-002
B5C Acid Dip Tube
B5C Base Dip
Tube
Page 158
Section 12
Warranty and Exclusions
Coverage of BioTector Warranty
The BioTector comes with a standard 1 year warranty for agreed applications. The BioTector warranty is
against manufacturing defects only. The warranty does not cover service/consumable items and
consequential damage.
Validity of Warranty
For the warranty to be valid, regular 6th Month servicing must be carried out using the Service Kit supplied by
the manufacturer. The recommendations on Maintenance and Service given in the manual should, as a
general rule, be followed. However, service needs will vary from site to site and difficult applications may
require additional service checks and/or service items not normally supplied with the BioTector Service Kit.
Exclusions
The following standard service items are not covered under the BioTector warranty:
• EMPP tubing
• Peristaltic pumps if the lifetime of the DC motor has been exceeded.
• PP Y connectors
• Filter mats in fan and vent housing
• Viton tubing in ozone generator
• Catalyst in ozone destructor
• CO2 filter
• Reactor Valve
• Exhaust Valve
• Diaphragm in Mixer Reactor
• 50 micron filters used in acid and base reagents
Limitations
The manufacturer liability with respect to certain moving parts (e.g. peristaltic pumps, rotary valve, sample
valve) will be limited to the manufacturer's specified lifetimes.
Agreed Applications
It is important that the Pre-Installation Questionnaire be filled in for each new application as the manufacturer
cannot guarantee the BioTector without knowing what chemicals/substances it is being exposed to.
Procedure for Warranty Repair/Replacement
Prior to returning any item under warranty, a Returned Merchandise Authorization (R.M.A.) number must first
be requested from the manufacturer. The R.M.A. number must be quoted on all correspondence.
Shipping Costs
The cost of transporting the parts to be repaired or replaced under warranty from the end-user to the
manufacturer shall be borne by the end-user. The transport costs from the manufacturer back to the
distributor shall be borne by the manufacturer.
Method of delivery shall be at the sender’s discretion. The manufacturer will use the lowest cost service
(including regular post) available. If the distributor requires goods returned on an urgent basis, the distributor
may nominate his preferred means of transport but shall then be liable for shipping costs.
BioTector Software
BioTector analyzers operate using BioTector proprietary software “BioTector OS3” (BioTector Operating
System 3). This software and all associated copyright is the sole property of BioTector Analytical Systems
Ltd. Purchase of the BioTector analyzer licenses the user to use the BioTector OS3 software as configured
and for the purpose of operating the BioTector during the life of the analyzer.
Page 159
Section 13
Appendices
Appendix 1
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
--4-20mA CHNG
A
A1 – A3
ALLDAT
Amp
ATM
BOD
C-276
CAL MUX
CAL SIGNAL
CAL
CE
CNFG
CO2
CO2p
CO2z
COD
CSA
CTFE
DegC
DIAG
DIN
DIW
EMPP
EN
ETL
F
FARCH
FFKM
FKM
FRP
H
H2SO4
HCl
HDPE
HS
Hz
ID
kPa
L
l/h
M
M1 – M3
mA
MAINT SIGNAL
MAN MODE TRIG
mbar
MCB
MCR
mg
No function is programmed
4-20mA Change signal
Amperes
24 hours average for stream 1 – 3
All Data
Amperes
Atmospheric pressure
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
Hastelloy
Calibration multiplexer
Calibration signal
Calibration reactions
European Conformity (Conformité Européene)
Configuration
Carbon dioxide
CO2 peak
CO2 analyzer zero
Chemical Oxygen Demand
Cross Sectional Area
Chloro-tri-fluoro-ethylene
Degrees Celsius (°C)
Diagnostics
German Institute for Standardization (Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.)
Deionized Water
Elastomer-modified-poly-propylene
European Norm
Electrical Testing Laboratories
Fuse
Fault Archive
Kalrez, perfluoro-elastomer
Viton, fluoro-elastomer
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
High Interrupt
Sulphuric acid
Hydrochloric acid
High Density Poly-Ethylene
High Speed
Hertz
Internal Diameter, Identification
Kilo Pascal
Liters / Low Interrupt
Liters per hour
Molar
Manual stream 1 - 3
Milli-amperes
Maintenance signal
Manual Mode Trigger
Millibar
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Multi-Component Reactor
milligram
Page 160
ml
ml/min
MMC/SD
N
N/A
N/D
N/E
NaOH
NBR
NDIR
NOTE
NPOC
O2
O3
OD
OS3
PCB
PEEK
PFA
POC
PP
ppb
ppm
PTFE
PVC
PVDF
RARCH
RS
RW
S
S1 – S3
SC
SK
SM
SMPL
sparge
SS-316
STD
STM ALARM
SYNC
T
TC
TCmgC/l
TIC
TICmgc
TICmgC/l
TICmgu
TOC
TOCmgc
TOCmgC/l
TOCmgu
V
VOC
VOCmgC/l
W
Z
ZC
Milliliter
Milliliters per minute
Multi Media Card/Secure Digital Card
Normal
Not Applicable
Normally de-energized
Normally Energized
Sodium Hydroxide
Nitrile Butadiene Rubber
Nondispersive Infrared
Notification
Non-purgeable Organic Carbon
Oxygen
Ozone
Outside Diameter
Operating System 3
Printed Circuit Board
Poly-ether-ether-ketone
Per-fluoro-alkoxy
Purgeable Organic Carbon
Poly-propylene
Parts per billion (g/l)
Parts per million (mg/l)
Poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene
Poly-vinyl-chloride
Poly-vinylidene-flouride
Reaction Archive
Remote standby reaction
Reactor wash reaction
Span
Stream 1 - 3
Span calibration
Span check
Manually input span adjust
Sample
Removal of a chemical by purging a gas through a liquid
Stainless Steel 316
Standard
Stream alarm
Synchronization
Time Lag (Time Delay)
Total Carbon
Total Carbon value in mgC/l
Total Inorganic Carbon
Calibrated Total Inorganic Carbon value in mgC/l
Total Inorganic Carbon value in mgC/l
Un-calibrated Total Inorganic Carbon value in mgC/l
Total Organic Carbon
Calibrated Total Organic Carbon value in mgC/l
Total Organic Carbon value in mgC/l
Un-calibrated, atmospheric pressure uncompensated TOC in mgC/l
Volts
Volatile Organic Carbon
Volatile Organic Carbon value in mgC/l
Watts
Zero
Zero calibration
Page 161
ZK
ZM
ZS
Zero check
Manually input zero adjust
Zero and Span
Page 162
Appendix 2
Contact Information
HACH Company
World Headquarters
Repair Service in the
United States:
P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado
80539-0389 U.S.A.
Tel (800) 227-HACH
(800) -227-4224
(U.S.A. only)
Fax (970) 669-2932
orders@hach.com
www.hach.com
HACH Company
Ames Service
100 Dayton Avenue
Ames, Iowa 50010
Tel (800) 227-4224
(U.S.A. only)
Fax (515) 232-3835
Hach Sales & Service
Canada Ltd.
1313 Border Street, Unit 34
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3H 0X4
Tel (800) 665-7635
(Canada only)
Tel (204) 632-5598
Fax (204) 694-5134
canada@hach.com
HACH LANGE GMBH
HACH LANGE LTD
HACH LANGE LTD
Willstätterstraße 11
D-40549 Düsseldorf
Tel. +49 (0)2 11 52 88-320
Fax +49 (0)2 11 52 88-210
info@hach-lange.de
www.hach-lange.de
Pacific Way
Salford
GB-Manchester, M50 1DL
Tel. +44 (0)161 872 14 87
Fax +44 (0)161 848 73 24
info@hach-lange.co.uk
www.hach-lange.co.uk
Unit 1, Chestnut Road
Western Industrial Estate
IRL-Dublin 12
Tel. +353(0)1 46 02 5 22
Fax +353(0)1 4 50 93 37
info@hach-lange.ie
www.hach-lange.ie
Hütteldorferstr. 299/Top 6
A-1140 Wien
Tel. +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92
Fax +43 (0)1 9 12 16 92-99
info@hach-lange.at
www.hach-lange.at
HACH LANGE
HACH LANGE FRANCE
S.A.S.
HACH LANGE SA
DR. LANGE
NEDERLAND B.V.
Rorschacherstrasse 30 a
CH-9424 Rheineck
Tel. +41 (0)71 886 91 11
Fax +41 (0)71 886 91 66
info@hach-lange.ch
www.hach-lange.ch
8, mail Barthélémy
Thimonnier Lognes F-77437
Marne-La-Vallée cedex 2
Tél. +33 (0)8 20 20 14 14
Fax +33 (0)1 69 67 34 99
info@hach-lange.fr
www.hach-lange.fr
Repair Service in Canada:
Motstraat 54
B-2800 Mechelen
Tél. +32 (0)15 42 35 00
Fax +32 (0)15 41 61 20
info@hach-lange.be
www.hach-lange.be
HACH LANGE S.R.L.
Repair Service in
Latin America, the
Caribbean, the Far East,
Indian Subcontinent,
Africa, Europe, or the
Middle East:
Hach Company World
Headquarters, P.O. Box 389
Loveland, Colorado,
80539-0389 U.S.A.
Tel +001 (970) 669-3050
Fax +001 (970) 669-2932
intl@hach.com
HACH LANGE GMBH
Laan van Westroijen 2a
NL-4003 AZ Tiel
Tel. +31(0)344 63 11 30
Fax +31(0)344 63 11 50
info@hach-lange.nl
www.hach-lange.nl
HACH LANGE S.L.U.
HACH LANGE APS
HACH LANGE AB
Åkandevej 21
DK-2700 Brønshøj
Tel. +45 36 77 29 11
Fax +45 36 77 49 11
info@hach-lange.dk
www.hach-lange.dk
Vinthundsvägen 159A
SE-128 62 Sköndal
Tel. +46 (0)8 7 98 05 00
Fax +46 (0)8 7 98 05 30
info@hach-lange.se
www.hach-lange.se
Via Riccione, 14
I-20156 Milano
Tel. +39 02 39 23 14-1
Fax +39 02 39 23 14-39
info@hach-lange.it
www.hach-lange.it
Edif. Arteaga Centrum
C/Larrauri, 1C- 2ª Pl.
E-48160 Derio/Vizcaya
Tel. +34 94 657 33 88
Fax +34 94 657 33 97
info@hach-lange.es
www.hach-lange.es
HACH LANGE LDA
HACH LANGE SP.ZO.O.
HACH LANGE S.R.O.
HACH LANGE S.R.O.
Av. do Forte nº8 Fracção M
P-2790-072 Carnaxide
Tel. +351 214 253 420
Fax +351 214 253 429
info@hach-lange.pt
www.hach-lange.pt
ul. Opolska 143 a
PL-52-013 Wrocław
Tel. +48 (0)71 342 10-83
Fax +48 (0)71 342 10-79
info@hach-lange.pl
www.hach-lange.pl
Lešanská 2a/1176
CZ-141 00 Praha 4
Tel. +420 272 12 45 45
Fax +420 272 12 45 46
info@hach-lange.cz
www.hach-lange.cz
Roľnícka 21 SK-831 07
Bratislava – Vajnory
Tel. +421 (0)2 4820 9091
Fax +421 (0)2 4820 9093
info@hach-lange.sk
www.hach-lange.sk
HACH LANGE KFT.
HACH LANGE S.R.L.
HACH LANGE
HACH LANGE SU
ANALİZ SİSTEMLERİ
LTD. ŞTİ.
Vöröskereszt utca. 8-10.
H-1222 Budapest XXII. ker.
Tel. +36 (06)1 225 7783
Fax +36 (06)1 225 7784
info@hach-lange.hu
www.hach-lange.hu
Str. Căminului nr. 3
Sector 2
RO-021741 Bucureşti
Tel. +40 (0) 21 205 30 03
Fax +40 (0) 21 205 30 17
info@hach-lange.ro
www.hach-lange.ro
8, Kr. Sarafov str.
BG-1164 Sofia
Tel. +359 (0)2 963 44 54
Fax +359 (0)2 866 15 26
info@hach-lange.bg
www.hach-lange.bg
HACH LANGE D.O.O.
ΗΑCH LANGE E.Π.Ε.
HACH LANGE E.P.E.
HACH LANGE D.O.O.
Fajfarjeva 15
SI-1230 Domžale
Tel. +386 (0)59 051 000
Fax +386 (0)59 051 010
info@hach-lange.si
www.hach-lange.si
Αυλίδος 27
GR-115 27 Αθήνα
Τηλ. +30 210 7777038
Fax +30 210 7777976
info@hach-lange.gr
www.hach-lange.gr
27, Avlidos str
GR-115 27 Athens
Tel. +30 210 7777038
Fax +30 210 7777976
info@hach-lange.gr
www.hach-lange.gr
Ivana Severa bb
42 000 Varaždin
Tel. +385 (0) 42 305 086
Fax +385 (0) 42 305 087
info@hach-lange.hr
www.hach-lange.hr
İlkbahar Mah. Galip Erdem
Cad. 616. Sok. No:9 06550
Oran-Çankaya/ANKARA
Tel. +90 (0)312 4908300
Fax +90 (0)312 4919903
bilgi@hach-lange.com.tr
www.hach-lange.com.tr
Page 163
HACH LANGE MAROC
SARLAU
Villa 14 – Rue 2 Casa
Plaisance
Quartier Racine Extension
MA-Casablanca 20000
Tél. +212 (0)522 97 95 75
Fax +212 (0)522 36 89 34
info-maroc@hach-lange.com
www.hach-lange.ma
Page 164
DOC012.97.80506
User Guidance for EMC Class A
Equipment
업무용을 위한 EMC 등급 A 장치에 대한 사용자
지침
사용자안내문
A급 기기 (업무용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는
업무용(A급) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자 또는
사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며, 가정외의
지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
This document contains information which is only required for the
export of this instrument into the People’s Republic of China.
本手册只包含出口到中华人民共和国的仪器的必要信息。
Statement on China "Management Methods for the Restriction of the Use of
Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products”, Ministry of
Information Industry Order #39. (China RoHS2)
中国信息产业部 39 号指令“限制在电子电气产品中使用有害物质管理办法”的声
明(China RoHS2)
Toxic or Hazardous Substances and Elements controlled by China RoHS:
中国电子电气产品中使用有害物质指令限制的有毒有害物质:
铅 - Pb - Lead, 汞 - Hg - Mercury
镉 - Cd – Cadmium
六价铬 - Cr+6 - Hexavalent Chromium
多溴联苯 - PBB - Polybrominated Biphenyl
多溴二苯醚 - PBDE - Polybrominated Diphenylether
(Ref: Chinese Ministry of Information Industry Order #39)
(参考:中国信息产业部第 39 号指令)
We declare that some components used in BioTector products have an Environmentally
Friendly Use Period (EFUP) of at least 25 years. The product manufacturing date can be
found on the product label on the main board enclosure behind the display.
特此声明 BioTector 产品中使用的某些元部件具有至少 25
年以上环境友好使用期(EFUP)。产品生产日期注明在展示后主板封闭件的产品标
签上。
CHINA ROHS DECLARATION TABLE
中国 ROHS 声明表
Part name
部件名称
Lead 铅
Toxic or Hazardous Substances and Elements
Mercury
Cadmium
Hexavalent
Polybrominated
Chromium
Biphenyls
汞
镉
六价铬
多溴联苯
Polybrominated
Diphenyl Ethers
多溴二苯醚
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(Cr6)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
NDIR PCBA*
X
0
0
0
0
0
This table is prepared according to the provisions of SJ/T1364-2014.
此表格遵照 SJ/T1364-2014 规定制作。
0: Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substance is below the concentration limit
requirement as described in GB/T 26572-2011.
0: 表示该有毒有害物质的含量低于浓度限制要求在 GB / T 26572-2011 说明。
X: Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substance in at least one
Homogeneous Material of the part exceeds the concentration limit requirement as described in GB/T
26572-2011. *Leaded Solder is used on two components in the NDIR assembly.
X: 表明零部件至少有一种均质材料的有毒有害物质超过 GB/T 26572-2011 规定的浓度限制含量。
* NDIR 组装件中有两种元部件使用了含铅的焊接材料。
July 2016